Sie sind auf Seite 1von 305

The Rules of ESCJ

Revision: 09
Effective Date: December 12, 2006

ESCJ

Copyright ©2004-2006 ESCJ


All rights reserved.
NOTE:
This is an English version of the Rules of ESCJ. It should be noted that the original
Japanese text will prevail over the English in case of conflict.

2
Contents

Chapter 1. General Rules ................................................................................1


1. Purpose .....................................................................................................................1
2. Definition..................................................................................................................1
3. Revision of the Rules................................................................................................ 3

Chapter 2. Rules of System Development (special high voltage: 22kV or


above) ...............................................................................................................4
Section 1. Policy for criteria for system development .................................. 4
Section 2. Planning policy for system development ..................................... 5
1. Policy for timing of system development planning................................................. 5
2. Valuation basis for countermeasure plan................................................................ 6
3. Phase/ground fault current...................................................................................... 6
Section 3. Policy for conditions for system development.............................. 8
1. Voltage class and electric system ............................................................................ 8
2. Neutral grounding system ....................................................................................... 8
3. System configuration ............................................................................................... 9
4. Tolerable maximum value of phase/ground fault current .................................... 10
5. Bus connection system at substation .................................................................... 10
6. Protective relay system.......................................................................................... 11
Section 4. Policy for system development ................................................... 13
1. Development scale of transmission facilities ........................................................ 13
2. Transmission route ................................................................................................ 14
3. Choice of substation site ........................................................................................ 15
Section 5. Criteria of system security ......................................................... 17
1. All facilities in service ............................................................................................ 17
2. Power system contingency (N-1 contingency)....................................................... 17
3. Power system contingency (N-2 contingency)....................................................... 18
Section 6. How to evaluate system security ............................................... 20
1. Conditions of assessment....................................................................................... 20
2. Policy for application of rated/overloaded capacity .............................................. 21
3. Policy for stability assessment .............................................................................. 21
4. Policy for voltage stability assessment ................................................................. 22
5. Policy for maintaining system frequency.............................................................. 23

-1-
Section 7. Coordinating process concerning planning of interconnection
(Specified generation) .................................................................................. 24
1. Requirement of assessment proposal .................................................................... 24
2. Facilities subject to coordinating process.............................................................. 24
3. Fundamental approach to factors considered and judgment during coordination
.................................................................................................................................... 24
4. Coordination process.............................................................................................. 25
5. Response to problem with coordinating process ................................................... 28
Section 8. Coordinating process concerning planning of interconnection
(Unspecified generation).............................................................................. 29
1. Requirement for commencement of coordinating process .................................... 29
2. Facilities subject to coordinating process.............................................................. 29
3. Fundamental approach to factors considered and judgment during coordination
.................................................................................................................................... 29
4. Coordination Process ............................................................................................. 30
5. Response to problem with coordinating process ................................................... 33
【Appendix】 Glossary .................................................................................. 34

Chapter 3. Rules for System Interconnection including Wheeling Service


(special high voltage) .....................................................................................35
Section 1. A place where applications for system interconnection are
accepted and policy for work flow ............................................................... 35
Section 2. Information on power producers and end-use customers required
for interconnection examination ................................................................. 36
1. Power producer....................................................................................................... 36
2. End-use customer................................................................................................... 37
Section 3. Required period for interconnection examination of generation
facilities ........................................................................................................ 38
Section 4. Required period for interconnection examination of end-use
customer ....................................................................................................... 39
Section 5. Contents of response to interconnection examination .............. 40
1. Power producer....................................................................................................... 40
2. End-use customer................................................................................................... 40
Section 6. How to determine the preparatory period for end-use customers
...................................................................................................................... 42
Section 7. Basic approach to constructing facilities between existing
transmission facilities and facilities of power producer and end-use

-2-
customers ..................................................................................................... 43
1. Connecting point with existing transmission facilities and transmission route. 43
2. Receiving/servicing voltage.................................................................................... 44
3. Number of circuits.................................................................................................. 44
4. Scale of facility to be developed ............................................................................. 44
5. Type of transmission line....................................................................................... 45
Section 8. Policy for technical requirements for interconnection of
generation facilities ..................................................................................... 46
1. Electric system ....................................................................................................... 46
2. Generator constants............................................................................................... 46
3. Power factor............................................................................................................ 47
4. Operable frequency of generation facilities .......................................................... 47
5. Measures for voltage fluctuation ........................................................................... 48
6. Measures for power quality ................................................................................... 49
7. Measures for stability ............................................................................................ 50
8. Countermeasures for phase/ground fault current ................................................ 50
9. Protective relay system.......................................................................................... 51
10. Neutral point grounding device, preventive measures for obstacles to
electromagnetic induction.......................................................................................... 54
11. Automatic load/power shedding device................................................................ 54
12. Device to confirm no-voltage on transmission line ............................................. 55
13. Telephone facility for security communication ................................................... 56
14. Dispatching data transmission equipment ......................................................... 56
Section 9. Policy for technical requirements for interconnection of demand
facilities ........................................................................................................ 58
1. Measures to secure power quality ......................................................................... 58
2. Protective relay system.......................................................................................... 60
3. Dispatching data transmission equipment ........................................................... 61
Section 10. How to classify property and construction of
generation/demand facility.......................................................................... 63
Section 11. Declining an application for system interconnection .............. 64
Section 12. Policy on sharing construction costs ........................................ 65
Section 13. Fundamental policy for modification/withdrawal of applications
...................................................................................................................... 66
1. When an applicant is offering................................................................................ 66
2. When TDSVIUs are offering.................................................................................. 66
Attached Paper 3-1 Standard work flow from interconnection examination

-3-
to commencement of wheeling service ........................................................ 68
Attached Table 3-1 Information on generation facilities for interconnection
examination ................................................................................................. 69
Attached Table 3-2 Information on end-use customer for interconnection
examination ................................................................................................. 75
Attached Table 3-3 Information items that must be collected................... 80
Attached Table 3-4 Examples of information items to collect when
necessary ...................................................................................................... 81
Attached Table 3-5 Maximum harmonic current per 1kW of contract power
...................................................................................................................... 82
Attached Table 3-6 Examples of information items to collect when
necessary ...................................................................................................... 83
Attached Paper 3-2 Work flow for modification/withdrawal of application
...................................................................................................................... 84
【Appendix】 Glossary .................................................................................. 86

Chapter 4. Rule of power system operation (special high voltage: 22kV or


above) .............................................................................................................89
Section 1. Policy for power system operation ............................................. 89
1. System operation under normal conditions .......................................................... 89
2. Operation under abnormal conditions .................................................................. 91
Section 2. Securing of regulating capability necessary for maintaining
power quality ............................................................................................. 101
1. Regulating system frequency under normal conditions ..................................... 101
2. Regulating system frequency under abnormal conditions ................................. 101
3. Reactive power voltage control under normal conditions................................... 104
4. Control of reactive power voltage under abnormal conditions........................... 105
5. Securing of hot reserve ........................................................................................ 107
Section 3. Generation schedule ................................................................. 110
1. Submission of schedule ........................................................................................ 110
2. Change of schedule............................................................................................... 110
3. Report/Publication concerning supply and demand balance.............................. 111
Section 4. Coordination of scheduled outage ............................................ 115
1. Scheduled outage to be coordinated .................................................................... 115
2. Fundamental items for scheduled outage coordination ..................................... 116
3. Work sharing of scheduled outage coordination ................................................. 117
4. Category of scheduled outage and its planning .................................................. 118

-4-
5. Coordination of scheduled outage planning........................................................ 119
6. Coordination of modifications and additions of scheduled outage after publication
of the scheduled outage plan ................................................................................... 121
7. Publication of decision and status of scheduled outage...................................... 121
8. Public announcement of scheduled outage plan and status............................... 122
9. Procedure to deal with failure in coordination of scheduled outage .................. 122
Section 5 Policy for load dispatching instructions.................................... 124
1. Coverage ............................................................................................................... 124
2. Scope and chain of load dispatching instruction ................................................ 125
3. Submission and reception of load dispatching instructions............................... 127
Section 6 Policy for priority load dispatching instructions ...................... 130
1. Evasive action for control of long-term based resources generation.................. 130
2. Cautions for control and shut-down of generation output ................................. 130
3. Requirement for wide-area power interchange for mutual cooperation............ 130
4. Submission of data to ESCJ necessary for evaluating wide-area power
interchange for mutual cooperation ........................................................................ 131
5. Conditions for giving priority load dispatching instructions ............................. 131
6. Recipient of priority load dispatching instructions ............................................ 131
7. Post-instructions explanation.............................................................................. 132
Section 7 Definition of interconnections and so forth (hereinafter referred
to as “ISF”) ................................................................................................. 133
1. Definition of terminology ..................................................................................... 133
Section 8 Authorization of wheeling contract using ISF.......................... 135
1. Applicant .............................................................................................................. 135
2. Person to give authorization................................................................................ 135
3. Effect of authorization of ECSF........................................................................... 135
4. Subjects to be authorized..................................................................................... 135
5. Classification and standard for authorization ................................................. 135
6. Maximum power to be authorized....................................................................... 137
7. Period of authorization ........................................................................................ 137
8. How to manage transactions using plural ISF ................................................... 137
9. How to manage greater maximum power due to modification of contracts and so
forth ..........................................................................................................................138
10. How to manage less maximum power due to modification of contracts and so
forth ..........................................................................................................................138
11. How to manage period extension due to modification of contracts and so forth
.................................................................................................................................. 138

-5-
12. How to manage period reduction due to modification of contracts and so forth
.................................................................................................................................. 138
13. How to manage greater/less maximum power and shorter period without
modification of contracts and so forth ..................................................................... 139
14. How to manage period expansion without modification of contracts .............. 139
14_2. Notification of integration.............................................................................. 140
15. Cancellation of Authorization............................................................................ 140
16. Authorization of ECSF in fiscal 2004................................................................ 140
17. Application procedures to authorize modification of ECSF ............................. 141
18. Procedures to cancel authorized ECSF ............................................................. 141
19. Application for inquiry....................................................................................... 141
20. Notification of authorization.............................................................................. 141
21. Annual examination of authorized ECSF ......................................................... 141
23. Information control and duty to protect privileged information...................... 142
Section 9. ATC of ISF ................................................................................ 143
1. Facilities subject to calculation of ATC............................................................... 143
2. Calculation of ATC, operating capacity, margin, scheduled power flow, and
superposed power flow ............................................................................................. 143
3. Period for calculation ........................................................................................... 143
4. Condition to formalize ATC ................................................................................. 143
5. Formula of ATC calculation................................................................................. 144
6. Calculation of ATC formula constituents............................................................ 144
7. Inspection of ATC and so forth ............................................................................ 152
8. Recording and storage of data ............................................................................. 152
9. Procedures for calculation of ATC and so forth (Initial ATC) ............................ 152
10. Procedures for renewal of ATC and so forth (Renewal ATC) ........................... 153
Section 10. Rules for use of ISF ................................................................ 154
1. Fundamental approach to use of ISF .................................................................. 154
2. Priority order of use of ISF .................................................................................. 155
3. Judging wheeling availability and registering/confirming capacity.................. 156
4. Assessment of annual SPFISF for the following fiscal year .............................. 160
5. Assessment of monthly SPFISF .......................................................................... 161
6. Selection of transaction routes ............................................................................ 162
7. Outline of advance judgment on wheeling availability ...................................... 163
8. Outline of additional capacity registration ......................................................... 163
9. Outline of modification of SPFISF ...................................................................... 165
10. How to make SPFISF on long-term/yearly/monthly/weekly basis................... 167

-6-
11. How to make SPFISF the following day............................................................ 169
12. Outline of management of SPFI ........................................................................ 170
13. Detailed procedures for advance judgment on wheeling availability .............. 171
14. Detailed procedures for additional capacity registration ................................. 172
15. Detailed procedures for modification of SPFISF .............................................. 174
16. Detailed procedures for modification of SPFI ................................................... 176
17. Availability of schedule modification................................................................. 178
18. Application of modification charges................................................................... 180
Section 11 Congestion management ......................................................... 183
1. Fundamental items of congestion management ................................................. 183
2. Scope and order of congestion management ....................................................... 183
3. Procedures for congestion management.............................................................. 184
4. Cautions for congestion management ................................................................. 185
5. Basic approach to cost of congestion management............................................. 185
6. Reporting and notification of result of congestion management ....................... 186
Attached Paper 4-1 Input data for planning of scheduled outage, and
samples of ESCJ web site and screen ....................................................... 187
Attached Paper 4-2 Format for submission of outage schedule .............. 188
Attached Paper 4-3 Posted outage schedule and state of implementation of
work on the system for publicizing of system information ...................... 189
Attached Table 4-1 Interconnection .......................................................... 190
【Appendix】Glossary .................................................................................. 191

Chapter 5. Rules of system development (high voltage) .............................198


Section 1. Policy for criteria for system development .............................. 198
Section 2. Planning of system development ............................................. 199
1. Policy for timing of system development planning............................................. 199
2. Valuation basis for countermeasure plan............................................................ 200
3. Phase fault current .............................................................................................. 200
Section 3. Policy for conditions for system development.......................... 202
1. Voltage class and electric system ........................................................................ 202
2. Neutral grounding system ................................................................................... 202
3. System configuration ........................................................................................... 203
4. Tolerable maximum value of phase fault current............................................... 203
5. Protective relay system........................................................................................ 203
Section 4. Policy for system development ................................................. 205
1. Development scale of distribution facilities ........................................................ 205

-7-
2. Distribution route ................................................................................................ 206
Section 5. Criteria of system security ....................................................... 208
1. All facilities in service .......................................................................................... 208
2. Power system contingency (N-1 contingency)..................................................... 208
Section 6. How to evaluate system security ............................................. 209
1. Conditions of assessment..................................................................................... 209
2. Policy for application of rated/overloaded capacity ............................................ 210

Chapter 6. Rules for System Interconnection including Wheeling Service


(high voltage) ............................................................................................... 211
Section 1. A place where applications for system interconnection are
accepted and policy for work flow ............................................................. 211
Section 2. Information on power producers and end-use customers required
for interconnection examination ............................................................... 212
1. Power producer..................................................................................................... 212
2. End-use customer................................................................................................. 213
Section 3 Required period for interconnection examination of generation
facilities ...................................................................................................... 214
Section 4. Required period for interconnection examination of end-use
customer ..................................................................................................... 215
Section 5. Contents of response to interconnection examination ............ 216
1. Power producer..................................................................................................... 216
2. End-use customer................................................................................................. 216
Section 6. How to determine preparatory period for end-use customer.. 218
Section 7. Fundamental policy for constructing facilities between existing
transmission and distribution facility and facility of power producer and
end-use customer ....................................................................................... 219
1. Connecting point with existing transmission facilities and distribution route. 219
2. Receiving/servicing voltage.................................................................................. 220
3. Number of circuits................................................................................................ 220
4. Scale of facility to be developed ........................................................................... 220
5. Type of distribution line....................................................................................... 221
Section 8. Policy for technical requirements for interconnection of
generation facilities ................................................................................... 222
1. Electric system ..................................................................................................... 222
2. Power factor.......................................................................................................... 222
3. Measures for voltage fluctuations ....................................................................... 223

-8-
4. Measures for power quality ................................................................................. 225
5. Countermeasures for phase fault current........................................................... 226
6. Protective relay system........................................................................................ 226
7. Neutral point grounding system ......................................................................... 229
8. Automatic load shedding device .......................................................................... 229
9. Device to confirm no-voltage on distribution line ............................................... 229
10. Telephone facility for security communication ................................................. 230
11. Prevention of reverse power flow through main transformer .......................... 231
Section 9. Policy for technical requirements for interconnection of demand
facilities ...................................................................................................... 232
1. Measures to secure power quality ....................................................................... 232
2. Protective relay system........................................................................................ 234
Section 10. How to classify property and construction of
generation/demand facilities ..................................................................... 235
Section 11. Declining an application for system interconnection ............ 236
Section 12. Policy on sharing construction costs ...................................... 237
Section 13. Fundamental policy for modification/withdrawal of
applications ................................................................................................ 238
1. When an applicant is offering.............................................................................. 238
2. When TDSVIUs are offering................................................................................ 238
Attached Paper 6-1 Standard work flowchart from interconnection
examination to commencement of wheeling service ................................ 240
Attached Table 6-1 Information on generation for interconnection
examination ............................................................................................... 241
Attached Table 6-2 Information on end-use customer for interconnection
examination ............................................................................................... 246
Attached Table 6-3 Maximum harmonic current per 1kW of contract power
.................................................................................................................... 251
Attached Paper 6-2 Work flow for modification/withdrawal of application
.................................................................................................................... 252

Chapter 7. Rules of power system operation (high voltage)........................254


Section 1. Policy for power system operation ........................................... 254
1. System operation under normal conditions ........................................................ 254
2. Operation under abnormal conditions ................................................................ 255
Section 2. Securing of regulating capability necessary for maintaining
power quality ............................................................................................. 260

-9-
1. Regulating system frequency under normal conditions ..................................... 260
2. Regulating system frequency under abnormal conditions ................................. 260
3. Reactive power voltage control under normal conditions................................... 260
4. Control of reactive power voltage under abnormal conditions........................... 261
Section 3. Generation schedule ................................................................. 262
1. Submission of schedule ........................................................................................ 262
2. Change of schedule............................................................................................... 262
Section 4. Coordination of scheduled outage ............................................ 266
1. Scheduled outages to be coordinated................................................................... 266
2. Fundamental items for scheduled outage coordination ..................................... 266
3. Work sharing of scheduled outage coordination ................................................. 268
4. Category of scheduled outages and its planning ................................................ 268
5. Coordination of scheduled outage planning........................................................ 268
6. Coordination of modification and addition of scheduled outages after decision of
the scheduled outage plan ....................................................................................... 269
7. Publication of decision and status of scheduled outages.................................... 269
Section 5 Policy for load dispatching instructions.................................... 270
1. Coverage ............................................................................................................... 270
2. Scope and system of load dispatching instruction .............................................. 271
3. Submission and reception of load dispatching instructions............................... 272

Chapter 8 Rules of information publication ................................................275


Section 1 Information publication............................................................. 275
1. Fundamental policy ............................................................................................. 275
2. Scope ..................................................................................................................... 275
3. Information publicized by ESCJ.......................................................................... 275
4. Means of information publication by ESCJ ........................................................ 276
5. Objects for information publication by ESCJ ..................................................... 276
6. Information which TDS publicize........................................................................ 276
7. Protection of information ..................................................................................... 277
Section 2 Disclosure of ATC and so forth of ISF....................................... 278
1. Important notice................................................................................................... 278
2. Scope ..................................................................................................................... 278
3. Specification of STLCA ........................................................................................ 278
4. Disclosure of ATC and so forth of interconnections ............................................ 279
5. Disclosure of ATCSF of STLCA ........................................................................... 281
6. Publication of ATCSF of network systems other than ISF................................. 281

- 10 -
Attached Table 8-1 Information publicized by ESCJ, method of publication,
scope of publication, and timing of publication ........................................ 282
Attached Table 8-2 Information publicized by TDS, means of publication,
objects for publication and timing of publication ..................................... 283
Attached Paper 8-1 Information to be protected (special high voltage) .. 284
Attached Paper 8-2 Information to be protected (high voltage) .............. 285
【Appendix】 Glossary ................................................................................ 286

Chapter 9 Rules of Reliability Assessment .................................................287


1. Assessment ........................................................................................................... 287
2. Required data for consideration .......................................................................... 288
3. Items for examination and submission for assessing reliability of interconnected
power systems and calculating operating capacity ................................................ 289
4. When to submit .................................................................................................... 291
5. Reliability assessment ......................................................................................... 291
6. Production and publication of reliability assessment report ............................. 291

- 11 -
Chapter 1. General Rules
1. Purpose
The rules of the Electric Power System Council of Japan (hereinafter
referred to as “Rules”) establish the standards and guidelines for the
planning and operation of power/distribution systems according to the
provisions of Item (1) of Article 94 of the Electricity Utilities Industry
Law.

2. Definition
The definitions of entities and facilities subject to the Rules are as
follows.

Definitions of terms used only within individual chapters will be added


at the end of each chapter.

(Entity)
“Load Serving Entity” (hereinafter referred to as “LSE”) means an
entity providing end-use customers with electricity as a vertically
integrated utility (hereinafter referred to as “VIU”) or power producer
and supplier (hereinafter referred to as “PPS”).

“Power producer” means an entity that generates electricity for VIUs or


PPSs (including a privately-owned power generator whose electricity
flows in power systems and so forth).

“End-use customer” means an entity who is supplied with electricity by


LSE and consumes it solely (including a privately-owned power
generator whose electricity does not flow in power systems and so forth).

“Transmission sector” constructs, owns, operates, maintains, and


administers the transmission systems at VIUs or wholesale electric
utilities (hereinafter referred to as “WEU”). The VIU also conducts the
overall coordinated operations and plannings of power systems that
include interconnected generators. The WEU, on the other hand,
operates the facilities under its jurisdiction within the control areas of
VIUs, coordinating with the transmission sector of VIUs (hereinafter
referred to as “TSVIU”).

1
“Distribution sector” at VIUs constructs, owns, operates, maintains, and
administers distribution systems and conducts the overall coordinated
operations and plannings of all distribution systems that include
interconnected generators.

“Electric Power System Council of Japan (hereinafter referred to as


“ESCJ”)” is an intermediate and limited liability company designated in
June 2004 by the Minister of Economy, Trade, and Industry as an
organization supporting the smooth implementation of transmission,
distribution and other related services in accordance with the provisions
of Paragraph 1 of Article 93 of the Electricity Utilities Industry Law.

“The division of ESCJ in charge of communicating and regulating


functions concerning the operation of interconnections (the Central
Communicating and Regulating Center (hereinafter referred to as
“CCRC”))” is an organization in charge of communication and regulation
concerning the transactions agreed on at power exchanges, those
between control areas, and operation and congestion management of
interconnections.

“The committee on the interconnected power system operation of ESCJ


(hereinafter referred to as “CIPSO”)” comprises experts and is
established at ESCJ in accordance with Article 45 of the Association of
ESCJ. CIPSO investigates and examines the daily duties of CCRC and
certifies the state of implementation of CCRC, and so on.

(Facilities)
“Trunk transmission system” is the main structure of power systems
composed of main power stations, substations, switching stations, and
transmission lines connecting these with a far-reaching influence on the
power systems.

“Network system” is a generic name of facilities used for the


transmission/distribution of electricity, including transmission lines,
distribution lines, substations, and switching stations.

2
“Interconnection” refers to interconnected lines of alternating current,
those of direct current, and AC/DC converters that continuously
interconnect the control areas of VIUs with the voltage of 250kV or
more.

“Servicing point” is where the transmission/distribution sectors of VIUs


(hereinafter referred to as “TDSVIU”) supply electricity to end-use
customers.

“Receiving point” is where TDSVIUs receive electricity from power


producers.

3. Revision of the Rules


The Rules can be revised by a resolution of the board of directors of
ESCJ after deliberations by Rule-making Committee when necessary.

3
Chapter 2. Rules of System Development (special high voltage: 22kV or
above)
Section 1. Policy for criteria for system development
Measures through system development need to be examined for the
stable supply of electricity when system security cannot be maintained
even if existing facilities are operated at full capacity to supply
electricity.

For this reason, TSVIUs are required to determine criteria for system
development.

In the specific cases shown below, TSVIUs study measures through


system development so as to realize efficient system development,
considering the use of facilities other than their own:

・New installation of supply or demand facilities;


・System security may not be satisfied as demand increases or power
sources are installed or retired etc.;
・A fault current that flows in case of a phase/ground fault of power
systems may exceed the permissible levels of existing systems;
・ It is deemed advantageous to develop systems because of the
greater cost of transmission loss, maintenance, etc. using existing
systems.

4
Section 2. Planning policy for system development
1. Policy for timing of system development planning
TSVIUs must complete the system development within the required
period as supply and demand increase, etc.

Further, TSVIUs must make system development plans to allow


sufficient time for construction work considering the following:

・Time for site acquisition in consideration of area circumstances (*1)


・Time to carry out construction, including time for planned outages
of facilities necessary for that construction work and so forth
・Time for various procedures outside/inside of an office (*2)
・Delivery date of machineries/materials
・Prior execution of construction (*3) in coordination with related
internal/external constructions
・ Phased implementation of a large-scale/wide-area system
development planning

(*1) Area circumstances: city developments, city development


planning, laws/regulations relevant to city development (natural
park laws, river laws, forest laws, city development laws, cultural
properties protection laws, etc.)

(*2) Various procedures outside/inside of an office: procedures based


on laws/regulations (construction planning reports regulated by
Electricity Utilities Industry Law, assessments of environment
regulated by ordinances and so forth, applications for permission
of exclusive use of road regulated by the road law, and so on)

(*3)Prior execution of construction: Prior execution of constructions


(ex: duct construction due to regulation of road digging,
construction of duct of suspension under bridge in accordance
with construction of bridge) in accordance with public enterprise
projects (road development projects, bridge development projects,
joint culvert projects, and so forth), large-scale land development
projects, and re-development projects.

5
2. Valuation basis for countermeasure plan
TSVIUs compare various countermeasures and choose appropriate ones
to maintain system security when making system development plans.
The following factors must be comprehensively considered:

a. Economy
・Cost of constructing transmission facilities
・Cost of operation/maintenance
・Transmission loss
・Future expansion, improvement step, etc.

b. Adaptability to social environment


・Overhead wire construction restricted by regulations
・Site circumstances, etc.

c. System of maintenance/operation
・Convenience of system maintenance
・Convenience of early action in case of trouble, etc.

d. Level of difficulty in construction execution

3. Phase/ground fault current


When a phase/ground fault current increases, the following problems
may occur:

・Shortage of capacity of transmission lines and serially connected


equipment such as circuit breakers
・ Interference in communication lines caused by electromagnetic
induction
・Damage to facilities caused by fault current

When making system development plans, therefore, TSVIUs usually


calculate the fault current for a three-phase short circuit and for a
single-phase ground short circuit for a neutral point solidly grounding
system, assuming that the system conditions are the severest within
the conceivable range of operation. When the fault currents so

6
calculated exceed the circuit breaking capability of the existing facilities,
countermeasures for phase/ground fault currents (installation of
current limiting reactor, switch to another transformer, substation, or
power system, interconnection to higher voltage lines, replacement of
circuit breakers, etc.) need to be studied. Fault currents must not exceed
the allowable maximum values of phase/ground fault currents shown in
Paragraph 4 of Section 3 “Tolerable maximum values of phase/ground
fault current”.

TSVIUs establish and make public the following conditions for


calculating phase/ground fault currents and then examine measures to
secure fairness and transparency:

・Conditions of generator commitments


・Assumed contingencies
・Kinds of electric constants to use

7
Section 3. Policy for conditions for system development
1. Voltage class and electric system
As for the electric system, the three-phase three-wire system by which it
is relatively easy to transform voltage and expand transmission
capability is used in principle. However, in specific cases such as
large-capacity and long-distance power transmission, direct current
facilities may also be considered from the viewpoint of economics,
technical problems and so on.

For historical reasons, two standard frequencies are used in Japan, one
in the eastern part and the other in the western part, and the same
conditions are required for each power system. These two standard
frequencies are 50Hz or 60Hz.

The standard classes of system voltages are established at each VIU as


a result of historical development. When developing power facilities,
appropriate voltage and electric systems are adopted in consideration of
coordination with existing systems and their effective applications.

TSVIUs establish and make public the standard system voltage classes.

2. Neutral grounding system


Neutral grounding is required to prevent abnormal voltage and to
ensure rapid/secure operations of protective relay systems when ground
faults occur in power systems.

For extra-high voltage systems, neutral point solidly grounding system


is adopted in principle for an economical insulation design. As for the
systems below extra-high voltages, a neutral point resistively or arc
suppression coil compensated grounding system is adopted in principle
to suppress ground fault currents. As for cable systems, a compensating
reactor grounding system is also taken into consideration because there
is a high risk of abnormal voltages of power systems when ground faults
occur due to the high capacitance to ground of cable systems.

As for specifications of grounding devices, appropriate grounding


impedance is used in order to prevent over-voltages and secure

8
operations of protective relay systems at the time of contingencies.

TSVIUs establish and make public appropriate grounding systems


according to each system voltage after considering all the conditions of
existing facilities, such as classes of system voltages and large charging
current of cable systems, when choosing a grounding system.

3. System configuration
(1) System configuration
TSVIUs must consider the system security required, phase fault
currents, ground fault currents, etc. when choosing either a loop
system or a radial system.

They establish and make public the detailed policy for system
configurations by considering the geographical relationship
between supply and demand, coordination with existing power
systems, and effective use of existing facilities.

(2) Choosing the number of circuits


The number of circuits of transmission lines is two in principle in
consideration of system security when one line fails and in view of
scheduled outages. The exceptions are as follows:

a. 1 circuit
・Transmission lines on which the influences of supply/generation
outage due to a single contingency (N-1) are assumed to be
limited.
・Transmission line to supply end-use customers by special high
voltages (In case of 1 line transmission requested by end-use
customers)

b. 3 circuits
・Spot network system
・Underground transmission system of multi-terminal unit system

TSVIUs establish and make public the policy for selecting the number
of circuits of transmission lines after considering system security,

9
scheduled outages, and other relevant matters.

(3) Number of terminals


The number of terminals must be determined after considering the
influence of a system outage, ease of transmission work, an upper
limit on the transfer capability restricted by protection systems,
economy and so on.

The number of terminals used at the same time is hard to be


determined indiscriminately by all VIUs because the matters which
are considered in order to determine them are different depending
upon each protective relay system standardized by VIUs.

Therefore, TSVIUs establish and make public the standard number of


terminals used at the same time according to the classes of system
voltages. Moreover, they also establish and make public the limited
number of terminals if a limit of number of terminals exists other than
that used at the same time.

4. Tolerable maximum value of phase/ground fault current


Technical examinations are necessary because existing facilities may be
damaged when fault currents exceed their tolerable maximum values at
the time of contingencies in power systems.

It is therefore necessary to determine the maximum values of


phase/ground fault currents permitted in power systems and also circuit
breaking capabilities based on them in order to securely isolate the
parts that have failed.

These tolerable maximum values of phase/ground fault currents are


required to coordinate all the facilities of power systems. Therefore,
TSVIUs establish and make public the tolerable maximum values of
phase/ground fault currents according to classes of system voltages.

5. Bus connection system at substation


Proper methods for bus connection systems at substations need to be

10
chosen after considering all the factors of system security, operational
flexibility of power system, operation/maintenance and economy. Some
examples of major bus connection systems are as follows:

a. Single bus system


・The simplest configuration and economically favorable as it does
not require many facilities or large space.
・Temporary blackouts of substations occur in case of bus faults.

b. Double bus system


・Larger space and more facilities are required than a single bus
system.
・ More advantageous regarding maintenance and operation of
power systems than a single bus system
・Blackouts of substations can be avoided in case of bus faults

c. One and a half bus system


・Smaller space and more circuit breakers are required than a
double bus system.
・Hardly any influence on power systems from bus faults.

TSVIUs establish and make public the standardized bus connection


systems according to the classes of system voltages after coordinating
each criterion of system security of VIUs because the impact of a system
contingency varies greatly depending on the class of system voltage,
system configuration, and so forth.

6. Protective relay system


TSVIUs must protect power systems appropriately, not only by securing
the reliability of power systems, preventing damage to power system
facilities, and protecting personal/public safety, but also by considering
the efficient development of power systems.

Appropriate protective relay systems are chosen to protect facilities


from damage such as fusion cutting of transmission lines and to
maintain system security by considering such factors as transfer
capability, the time required to break a circuit by a circuit breaker, and

11
the number of terminals to be protected.

They are also chosen based on system conditions affecting the operating
sensitivity of protective relay systems such as a neutral grounding
system and voltage/current distribution of power systems with and
without contingencies.

Moreover, protective relay systems combined with suitable


communication facilities are chosen when high-speed circuit-breaking
and reliable identification of fault points are necessary for system
stability.

An appropriate protective relay system needs to be chosen after


considering the importance of power systems, power system
configuration, and coordination with existing protective relay systems.
TSVIUs therefore establish and make public the standardized
protective relay systems.

12
Section 4. Policy for system development
1. Development scale of transmission facilities
TSVIUs need to carefully choose the development scale of transmission
facilities by considering all factors such as future system configuration,
increase of demand, and economy, as transmission facilities require
immense investment to construct and are used for a long time.

(1) Development scale


When choosing the development scale of transmission facilities, the
following factors should be considered:

a. Future outlook
・Increase of demand (*1)
・Final scale (*2) of transmission facilities
・Future system configuration (*3), etc.

b. Technology
・Phase/ground fault current and stability
・Voltage change at the time of switching circuit breaker, etc.

c. Economy
・Construction cost of transmission facilities
・Transmission loss
・Process of development and replacement, etc.

(*1) Increase of demand: Factors contributing to localized increases


in demand, such as trends of past demand increase, community
development, and industrial complex construction are taken into
consideration.

(*2) Final scale: This refers to the capacity of the final configuration
(the number of banks) and the number of feeders for a substation.
For a transmission line, it means transmission capacity, or the
number of circuits coordinated with the final scale of the related
substations and power stations.

(*3) Future system configuration: This is established so as to

13
improve the efficiency in future electric power supply and
demand by taking into account demand forecast by area, power
resource distribution, present system configuration and actual
conditions of facilities.

(2) Standard scale of facilities


TSVIUs establish and make public the standard scale of the
facilities as fallows according to the classes of system voltage as it
is necessary to coordinate the capacity of each facility in order to
construct transmission systems efficiently.

a. Transmission line
・Type of electric wires
・Size of electric wires
・Number of conductors, etc.

b. Substation
・Transformer capacity
・Number of transformers, etc.

2. Transmission route
TSVIUs choose transmission routes based on the policies shown below.

Overhead lines are used in principle for economy when constructing


transmission lines. However, underground transmission lines are used
in the following cases:

・ Overhead lines are difficult to construct due to regulations,


technology, site situation, or other reasons.

Transmission routes are chosen by considering the following factors


because they pass through various areas with different surroundings.

(1) Factors to be considered when choosing overhead transmission


routes
a. Future outlook
・Future system configuration

14
・Trend of demand distribution, etc.

b. Site and its surroundings


・Natural condition
・Harmony with social surroundings
・Difficulty of site acquisition
・Influence of disasters, etc.

c. Construction/maintenance
・Difficulty in construction and maintenance, etc.

d. Economy
・Construction cost, etc.

(2) Factors to be considered when choosing underground transmission


routes
The following factors are also considered in addition to those for
overhead transmission routes.

e. Coordination with city planning and so forth


・Coordination with city planning
・ Coordination with scheduling of construction requiring
permission for use of road
・Coordination with joint culvert development planning, etc.

f. Technology
・Influence on the transmission capacity of underground power
cables from adjacent parallel cables of same way (duct), etc.

3. Choice of substation site


TSVIUs choose sites of substations as follows:
As substations are a basis for supplying electricity, they choose sites
where electricity can be supplied efficiently for a long time. The
following factors are taken into consideration:

a. Future outlook
・Future system configuration

15
・Trend of demand distribution, etc.

b. Design
・Difficulty in introducing transmission/distribution lines
・Type of substation (outdoor, indoor, underground, etc.) and space
required, etc.

c. Site and its surrounding


・Natural conditions
・Harmony with social surroundings
・Difficulty in site acquisition, etc.

d. Construction/maintenance
・Bringing in and carrying out facilities such as heavy equipment,
etc.

e. Economy
・Construction cost, etc.

16
Section 5. Criteria of system security
To maintain the system security, it is necessary to coordinate the
reliability of all the components of power systems from power stations
right down to the ends of network systems.

This means that TSVIUs need to make system development plans such
that criteria of system security are met when all facilities are in service
and during abnormal conditions (N-1 contingency, N-2 contingency),
taking into account the frequency and influence of power system
contingencies.

1. All facilities in service


Criteria of system security with all facilities in service

・The power flow does not exceed the rated capability of the facilities
shown in Paragraph 2 of Section 6 “Policy for application of
rated/overloaded capacity”.
・System voltage is maintained properly.
-Maintenance of system voltage within a targeted range
-Maintenance of voltage stability
-Suppression of voltage fluctuation by facility operation (*1)
・A generator can be operated stably.

As the targeted range of system voltage and the permitted range of


system voltage fluctuation are to be determined according to the scale
and configuration of power systems, TSVIUs establish and make public
the criteria of system security.

(*1) Voltage fluctuation by facility operation: A voltage fluctuation that


occurs during normal operations such as switching of phase
modifying facilities and operation of on-load tap changer.

2. Power system contingency (N-1 contingency)


Criteria of system security required at the time of a single contingency
of the facilities. (N-1 contingency (*2))

・ Blackouts should not occur in principle in the event of N-1

17
contingency, but may be permitted if their influences are small
enough. Blackout must be avoided as much as possible for the
areas with the large social impact due to it, such as the areas of a
high density of load in the event of N-1 contingency. The blackouts
due to N-1 contingency on the trunk transmission lines must be
also avoided as much as possible.

・In the event of an N-1 contingency on transmission lines and the


like interconnecting power systems with generators, the influence
of the power-of-generators-not-supplied (*3) must be small enough.
When a power producer admits power shedding by himself and its
influence is small enough, TSVIUs can regard power shedding for
the purpose of protecting transmission facilities from overload as
the power-of-generators-not-supplied whose influence is small
enough supposing maintenance of system security.

TSVIUs establish and make public the policy for system performance
following the N-1 contingency described above, in view of the
importance and social impact of the power systems.

(*2) N-1 contingency: Subject to a single contingency of a circuit, a


transformer, and a generator in principle
(*3) Power-of-generator-not-supplied: Collectively refers to loss of
generation and power shedding

Loss of generation: Loss of generation due to an N-1 contingency on the


transmission lines interconnecting with generating facilities and, such
as those with a single circuit and a radial configuration
Power shedding: Power shedding through transfer tripping system,
OLR (overload relay), and so forth

3. Power system contingency (N-2 contingency or more serious


contingencies)
Criteria of system security required at the time of simultaneous losses

18
of two facilities. (N-2 contingency (*4))

・A partial outage of generation and supply can be permitted in case


of an N-2 contingency as these rarely occur. However, when the
supply outage is large and may have a serious social impact, some
measures must be studied.

TSVIUs establish and make public the policy for system performance
following the N-2 contingencies as well as more serious contingencies if
needed, taking into account the impact on system security and the
social impact.

(*4) N-2 contingency: Subject to the contingencies of simultaneous


losses of two facilities such as those on double circuit transmission
lines

19
Section 6. How to evaluate system security
TSVIUs need to evaluate whether the development plan of power
systems satisfies the criteria of system security during normal
conditions and abnormal conditions (N-1 and N-2 contingency)
according to an increase of demand, newly-installed/additional
generating facilities, and retirement of generating facilities.

System security is evaluated by the following methods.

1. Conditions of assessment
The conditions of power flows through transmission lines assumed by
TSVIUs when making system development plans are deemed severest
within a conceivable range of operation.

TSVIUs establish and make public the following policy for the assumed
demand/generators which is used in assessing conditions.

a. Assumed demand (*1)


In principle, average demand for highest three days in certain
period is used. Light demand is also used for assessment when the
power flows are heavier at the time of light demand, as those from
a substation with both light demand and flat output of generation.

However, the maximum demand may be used for contingencies


that cover a wide area and lead to a serious situation.

b. Assumed generators
Assumed generators are confirmed (contracted or planned)
between TSVIUs and the entities that interconnect their
generation facilities with power systems. Generation outputs are
in principle set up so that outputs are the heaviest within a
conceivable range of operation, taking into account the operating
patterns of generators based on their roles, characteristics,
contracts, etc. and their periodic repair schedules.

(*1) Assumed demand: Corresponding to network systems (the


electric power supplied through the transmission facilities of

20
VIUs)

2. Policy for application of rated/overloaded capacity


The rated/overloaded capacity needs to be determined to protect
facilities such as transmission lines and transformers from damage.

The rated capacity is determined by the thermal limit below which the
facilities can continue to operate.

The overloaded capacity is determined by the thermal limit below which


the remaining facilities can operate for a limited period in the event of a
single contingency of two circuit transmission lines and parallel
operating transformers.

Power flows through transmission systems with all transmission


facilities in service are kept under the rated capacity and they are under
the overloaded capacity in the event of a single contingency of parallel
operating facilities.

TSVIUs establish and make public the rated/overloaded capacity of


transmission facilities according to the procedures of network switching
after the occurrence of contingencies arising from load dispatching
systems, configurations of power systems, and so forth.

3. Policy for stability assessment


Synchronous generators in the AC power systems are interconnected
and operate in sync.

Generally, system stability means stable operation of such generators


while being in sync, whereas instability causes the generators to become
out of sync, exerting a large impact on power systems. To avoid this,
system stability must be maintained.

When TSVIUs assess stability during system development planning,


power systems must be stable in steady states and transient stability
(*2)(*3) in severest power flows which could conceivably occur. If this is
not satisfied, appropriate countermeasures such as having more than

21
one towerline and installing intermediate switching stations need to be
taken.

In principle, power systems must remain stable in the event of a


3-phase ground fault with normal clearing. Assumed contingencies
shown below may also be assessed by taking into account the power
system configuration and the probability of contingencies.

・Simultaneous in-phase ground fault on 2 circuits – Normal clearing


(operation of primary protection) – Reclosing
・Simultaneous 2-phase/3-line ground fault on 2 circuits – Normal
clearing (operation of primary protection) – Reclosing
・Delayed clearing (failure to operate primary protection)
・Bus fault
・Loss of towerline

When assessing steady-state stability, power systems must remain


stable in the event of subtle disturbances.

TSVIUs establish and make public the details of power system


conditions to be assessed according to regional characteristics such as
lightning in winter and power system configuration.

(*2) Transient stability: Refers to stability in the event of a severe


disturbance on power systems
(*3) Steady-state stability: Refers to stability in the event of a subtle
disturbance on power systems under normal conditions

4. Policy for voltage stability assessment


A sudden increase in demand during the summer peak and
disturbances due to contingencies such as a line fault may affect voltage
control of a phase modifying facility and on-load tap changer, thus
destabilizing the system voltage. An abnormal drop in the system
voltage could lead to a system collapse and large-scale blackout.
Therefore, the voltage must be kept stable to prevent such a
phenomenon.

22
When the TSVIUs assess voltage stability during system development
planning, the voltage stability for an assumed contingency needs to be
maintained even when power flows are severest within the conceivable
range. If this is not satisfied, appropriate countermeasures such as
installing phase modifying facilities need to be taken.

Voltage stability is assessed assuming an N-1 contingency in principle.


Voltage stability is also assessed for contingencies such as loss of
towerline in the loop system after taking into account power system
configurations.

TSVIUs establish and make public the details of the power system
conditions to be assessed according to the power system characteristics.

5. Policy for maintaining system frequency


When the system frequency drastically drops below the permissible
level of continuous generation due to a loss of large generation, the
remaining interconnected generators may trip in a cascade. Such
additional trips of generators may lower the system frequency further,
leading to a large-scale blackout. Therefore, the system frequency must
be maintained properly even in the event of a contingency in order to
prevent such a phenomenon.

TSVIUs assess the maintenance of the system frequency on light load


conditions that are severe for it on when planning the system
development.

In principle, a loss of towerline is considered as an assumed


contingency.

If the system frequency is not satisfied, appropriate countermeasures


such as having more than one towerline needs to be taken.

TSVIUs establish and make public the system frequency maintenance


according to the scale of power system and the structure of system
frequency control.

23
Section 7. Coordinating process concerning planning of interconnection
(Specified generation)
When it becomes necessary to assess interconnection development and
others associated with the specified generation development,
coordinating processes are established as follows.

1. Requirement of assessment proposal


When it becomes necessary to assess interconnection development and
others associated with the specified generation development, the
developer and the VIUs concerned with the interconnection (hereinafter
referred to as “the VIUs concerned”) propose a required assessment.

When an existing interconnection cannot provide the developer with all


the wheeling services requested by him, an assessment of
interconnection development and so forth shall be initiated on condition
that the developer and the VIUs concerned discuss the matter and
reach a consensus on its necessity.

2. Facilities subject to coordinating process


During interconnection development, facilities subject to the
coordinating process are as follows except for a transmission line
connecting to the generation facilities.

(1) Interconnection (interconnection required to develop among the


control areas of VIUs in case of transaction of electricity through
those areas)
(2) Transmission lines within the control areas that interconnect to
both terminals of the interconnection concerned
(3) Transmission lines within the control areas required to assess
development along with the assessment of the development of the
interconnection concerned

3. Fundamental approach to factors considered and judgment during


coordination
Criteria of system security used in the coordinating process concerning
interconnection development planning are based on Section 5 “Criteria
of system security” and the planning standards of the VIUs concerned.

24
When coordinating interconnection development planning, it is
essential to thoroughly investigate and assess the countermeasures and
their substitutes in terms of economy, system security, ease of
construction and so on to achieve high cost effectiveness.

When building transmission facilities along with generation


development, the developer of generation facilities in principle pays the
cost of developing transmission facilities. The committee shown below
discusses and proposes how to pay the cost case by case, considering
arguments for partial payment by all the parties concerned.

4. Coordination process
4-1 Receipt of assessment application
The corporate planning division of ESCJ receives a proposal for
assessment.

The corporate planning division submits the proposal for assessment to


the board of directors together with whether another coordinating
process concerning unspecified generation is initiated and a WG
(working group) is set up according to Section 8 “Coordinating process
concerning planning of interconnection (Unspecified generation)”.

The board of directors decides on the disbandment of the WG and


informs its members of the decision through the committee shown below
if the coordinating process concerning unspecified generation is
initiated and the WG is set up.

4-2 Determination of assessment structure


The board of directors decides on the assessment structure including
the organization of the committee in charge of the assessment
concerned (hereinafter referred to as “Committee of Interconnection
Development: CID”) and informs CID of the commencement of the
coordinating process according to the coordinating process determined
by this section.

4-3 Recruitment and request to participate in assessment

25
CID advises the developer of the generation facilities concerned and the
VIUs concerned (hereinafter referred to as “Proposer of assessment”) to
organize an assessment meeting concerning the development of the
interconnection (hereinafter referred to as “Assessment meeting”) and
also recruits the participants of the assessment meeting from among
the members of ESCJ except for the person who proposed the
assessment. Of the following ESCJ members, those who wish to
participate in the assessment meeting inform the proposer of
assessment.

(1) A member who plans to use a specific transmission service of the


interconnection concerned and who is willing to share the cost of
its construction
(2) Entities that construct and own interconnection except for the
VIUs concerned
(3) Neutral members (request for participation in the assessment
meeting through the mutual consent of the proposer of
assessment and the members shown in (1) and (2) above is
necessary)

CID also requests neutral members except for the members of ESCJ to
participate in the assessment meeting on condition that the
participants of the assessment meeting give their consent if necessary.

Moreover, all participants swear the duty to protect privileged


information and conduct the matters accordingly.

4-4 Determination of participants of assessment meeting


The proposer of assessment determines the participants from among
those who want to join the assessment meeting and informs CID of
whether they are allowed to join and the reasons if they are not. CID
reports the participants, including the neutral members who are
allowed, to the board of directors.

In addition to requesting those who are allowed to participate in the


assessment meeting, CID also informs those who are not of the reasons
for their rejection.

26
Those members who are requested to participate in the assessment
meeting by CID take part in it and conduct the assessment.

4-5 Matters to be assessed in assessment meeting


The assessment meeting assesses the matters shown below. It can
request the VIUs concerned to submit data for the assessment if
necessary.

(1) Necessity of interconnection development and so forth


(2) Necessary amount of interconnection capacity and its effect
(3) Plan to develop interconnection (method of construction,
roughly estimated cost, schedule, etc.)
(4) Fundamental policy concerning how to pay the cost of
interconnection development (proportion between the payment
concerned and flat rate)

4-6 Submission/resolution of interim report


The assessment meeting performs its duty swiftly and submits the
interim report to the board of directors every 6 months through CID if
the period of assessment exceeds 6 months.

The board of directors makes a resolution on the interim report and


informs CID of its resolution, which then informs the assessment
meeting of the resolution.

4-7 Establishment/submission of report


The assessment meeting produces a report describing the items shown
below and submits it to CID:

(1) Reported/assessed details


(2) Conditions to be assessed
(3) Result of assessment
(4) Matters that require attention
(5) Future issues to be assessed
(6) Other specific matters

27
4-8 Resolution of report
CID accepts the report produced by the assessment meeting and
submits it to the board of directors. The board of directors makes a
resolution on it.

5. Response to problem with coordinating process


If a problem arises during the coordinating process from the acceptance
of the assessment to the submission of the report, the entities concerned
can propose it as a troubleshooting case.

28
Section 8. Coordinating process concerning planning of interconnection
(Unspecified generation)
The coordinating process that requires the assessment of
interconnection development without specifying the generation
facilities concerned according to the increase of transactions through
interconnections is established as follows.

1. Requirement for commencement of coordinating process


When it is necessary to assess the interconnection development without
specifying the generation facilities concerned according to the increase
of transactions through interconnections, the coordinating process is
triggered by the objective index established.

The board of directors establishes the objective index.

If as a result of this coordinating process the interconnection


development is rejected, the coordinating process is not triggered until
the board of directors deems it necessary in view of likely significant
changes in future and so forth.

2. Facilities subject to coordinating process


During interconnection development, facilities subject to the
coordinating process are as follows except for a transmission line
connecting to the generation facilities.

(1) Interconnection (interconnection required to develop among the


control areas of VIUs in case of transaction of electricity
through those areas)
(2) Transmission lines within the control areas that interconnect to
both terminals of the interconnection concerned
(3) Transmission lines within the control areas required to assess
development along with the assessment of the development of
the interconnection concerned.

3. Fundamental approach to factors considered and judgment during


coordination
Criteria of system security used in the coordinating process concerning

29
interconnection development planning are based on Section 5 “Criteria
of system security” and the planning standards of the VIUs concerned.

When coordinating interconnection development planning, it is


essential to thoroughly investigate and assess the countermeasures and
their substitutes in terms of economy, system security, ease of
construction and so on to achieve high cost effectiveness.

4. Coordination Process
4-1 Commencement of coordinating process
When an item satisfies the requirement for the commencement of the
coordinating process, the Interconnection Operation Committee (IOC)
informs the General Planning Committee (GPC) of it. GPC confirms it
and informs the members of ESCJ of the commencement of the
coordinating process.

A member who plans to use a specific transmission service of the


interconnection concerned and intends to share the cost of its
construction (hereinafter referred to as “Developer of the generation
facilities concerned”) informs GPC to that effect.

GPC reports the commencement of the coordinating process and the


developer of the generation facilities concerned to the board of directors.

The board of directors decides on and makes public the commencement


of the coordinating process corresponding to this report.

4-2 Determining the assessment structure


The board of directors decides on the assessment structure including
the organization of the committee in charge of the assessment
concerned (hereinafter referred to as “Committee of Interconnection
Development: CID”).

If the board of directors decides to combine this assessment with other


assessment cases such as those where the developer of the generation
facilities concerned can be specified or the existing coordinating process
of interconnection development triggered by the generation facilities

30
concerned has commenced, it instructs CID to start the coordinating
process according to Section 7 “Coordinating process concerning
planning of interconnection (Specified generation)”.

If it decides against it, the board of directors determines the assessment


structure and notifies CID to start the coordinating process described in
this section.

4-3 Organization of WG and delegation of its chief examiner


When CID is notified to commence the coordinating process by the
board of directors, it determines the organization of WG and its chief
examiner and informs the chief examiner of its decision.

4-4 Recruitment and request to participate in WG


CID requests the VIUs concerned to participate in WG and recruit the
members of ESCJ except for the VIUs concerned at the same time. Of
the following ESCJ members, those who wish to participate in WG
inform CID of their intention:

(1) Interested entities except for the VIUs concerned (VIUs affected
by the decrease of capacity margin through the interconnection
concerned)
(2) Entities that construct and own interconnection except for the
VIUs concerned
(3) Neutral members who are requested to participate in WG,
provided that the VIUs concerned and the members shown in
(1) and (2) above give their consent

CID also requests the neutral members except for the members of ESCJ
to participate in WG on condition that the participants give their
consent if necessary.

Moreover all participants swear an oath concerning the duty to protect


privileged information and conduct the matters accordingly.

4-5 Determination of participants of WG


CID adds up the members participating in WG and those who wish to do

31
so, and informs the chief examiner of WG of the total.

CID decides on the members of WG through discussion with the chief


examiner of WG. CID reports the members of WG including the neutral
members other than ESCJ members who are allowed to join to the
board of directors.

In addition to requesting those who are allowed to participate in WG,


CID informs those who are not of the reasons for their rejection.

Members who are requested to participate in WG by CID take part in it


and conduct the assessment.

4-6 Matter to be assessed in WG


WG assesses the matters shown below.

ESCJ can request the VIUs concerned to submit data for the
assessment if necessary.

(1) Necessity of interconnection development and so forth


(2) Necessary amount of interconnection capacity and its effect
(3) Plan to develop interconnection (method of construction,
roughly estimated cost, schedule, etc.)
(4) Fundamental policy concerning how to pay the cost of
interconnection development

4-7 Submission/resolution of interim report


WG performs its duty swiftly and submits the interim report to the
board of directors every 6 months through CID if the period of
assessment exceeds 6 months.

The board of directors makes a resolution on the interim report and


informs CID of its resolution, which then informs WG of the resolution.

4-8 Establishment/submission of report


WG produces a report describing the items shown below and submits it
to CID:

32
(1) Reason to commence coordinating process
(2) Conditions to be assessed
(3) Result of assessment
(4) Matters that require attention
(5) Future issues to be assessed
(6) Other specific matters

4-9 Resolution of report


CID accepts the report produced by WG and submits it to the board of
directors. The board of directors makes a resolution on it.

5. Response to problem with coordinating process


If a problem arises during the coordinating process from the acceptance
of assessment to the submission of the report, the entities concerned can
propose it as a troubleshooting case.

33
【Appendix】 Glossary
“Transmission facilities” mean transmission lines and substations
which are determined by Electricity Utilities Industry Law.

“Cost of operation/maintenance” means expenses required to operate


and maintain transmission facilities such as patrol, inspection, and tree
trimming.

“Assumed contingency” means contingencies used as preconditions to


examine transient stability, voltage satiability, phase/ground fault
current, etc.

“Power supply line” means transmission lines connecting the generation


facilities to power systems.

“Power system contingency” means problems that can lead to stoppage


of facility operation.

“Average power for highest three days in certain period” means the
average power obtained from the highest three values of maximum
values of average demand for one hour in a day in a month.

34
Chapter 3. Rules for System Interconnection including Wheeling Service
(special high voltage)
Section 1. A place where applications for system interconnection are
accepted and policy for work flow

VIUs follow the details as described below concerning a place where an


application for wheeling service is accepted and a policy of work flow
from the viewpoint of fairness and transparency.

a. A place where an application is accepted


VIUs set up places in TDSVIUs to accept applications for wheeling
services to prevent information concerning the wheeling service
from being used for purposes other than the specified ones.

b. Work flow
The work flow from interconnection examination to
commencement of wheeling service carried out by TDSVIUs is
standardized as shown in the attached Paper 3-1.

Regarding system interconnections that concern VIUs’ generation


facilities and recipients of service, VIUs also clarify places where those
applications are accepted and perform their tasks in accordance with
the work flow in the attached Paper 3-1 from the viewpoint of fairness
and transparency.

TDSVIUs establish and make public the places where applications for
system interconnection are accepted and the work flows according to
such matters as the structures of organization, divisions of duties,
procedures of acquisition of site and survey for construction.

As for system interconnections that concern power producers other than


those described above, VIUs establish and make public the places where
applications for system interconnection are accepted and the work flows
depending upon individual contracts to ensure transparency.

35
Section 2. Information on power producers and end-use customers required
for interconnection examination
TDSVIUs request information on the facilities of power producers and
end-use customers from an applicant for an interconnection
examination concerning wheeling service.

An applicant for the interconnection examination provides TDSVIUs


with the following information.

An applicant for the interconnection examination concerning power


producers and end-use customers other than those above provides
TDSVIUs with information equivalent to the following.

When the above application is made, TDSVIUs discuss relevant matters


with the applicant for interconnection examination.

1. Power producer
TDSVIUs request to present the information on the facilities of power
producers shown in the attached Table 3-1 concerning the following
items in principle:

a. Name of power producer, generation site, and receiving point;


b. If power generating installations are located outside a franchised
area of a VIU, the following information is to be provided: a
cross-area wheeling service of electricity contract concluded with a
VIU other than the concerned VIU necessary for the wheeling
service or the contents of an application;
c. Generating system, output power, detailed specifications of
generator, various parameters of step-up transformer;
d. Maximum and minimum values of receiving power;
e. Voltage at a receiving point;
f. Loaded/receiving facilities at power generation site;
g. Desired commencement date of wheeling service;
h. Number of circuits (regular, standby);
i. Name and address of applicant.

When a receiving point is an interconnection, c, e, f, and h are not

36
required.

When requesting a cross-area wheeling service of electricity, the


following item needs to be added:

j. Name of the entity that receives electricity delivered through the


cross-area wheeling service of electricity, and the point of delivery;

TDSVIUs establish and make public the required information except for
the information shown in the attached Table 3-1 along with reasons for
its necessity.

2. End-use customer
TDSVIUs request to present the information on the facilities of end-use
customers shown in the attached Table 3-2 concerning the following
items in principle:

a. Name of end-use customer, location of demand, and servicing


point;
b. Contract power;
c. Voltage at servicing point;
d. Loaded/receiving facilities at location of demand;
e. Desired commencement date of wheeling service;
f. Number of circuits (regular, standby);
g. Name and address of applicant.

When there are generation facilities (excluding those for emergency not
interconnected to power systems) installed at the location of demand,
the following item is also required:

h. Generating system of generation facilities, output of generation,


detailed specifications of generation, various parameters of step-up
transformer.

TDSVIUs establish and make public the required information except for
the information shown in the attached Table 3-2 along with reasons for
its necessity.

37
Section 3. Required period for interconnection examination of generation
facilities
When TDSVIUs accept an application for interconnection examination
of generation facilities, they supply the result as follows:

They notify the result of interconnection examination (the contents


provided by Section 5 “Contents of response to interconnection
examination”) immediately after the examination and within 3 months
after accepting an application.

If the period of reply exceeds 3 months, they explain to the applicant the
reason for the extension, the state of progress, and the prospects.

38
Section 4. Required period for interconnection examination of end-use
customer
TDSVIUs need to clarify whether applications for wheeling services are
required to start construction and, if such construction is necessary, the
type of construction, and standard periods in which a response must be
made. TDSVIUs establish and make public whether applications for
wheeling service are required for any construction and the standard
required periods of their responses according to the types of the
construction concerned if such construction is necessary.

If the response periods are longer than the standard ones, TDSVIUs
explain why the reason.

39
Section 5. Contents of response to interconnection examination
TDSVIUs, when they accept applications, provide the applicants of
interconnection examination concerning wheeling services with the
following information to enable them to assess the feasibility. .

TDSVIUs, when they accept applications, also respond to the applicants


for interconnection examination concerning power producers and
end-use customers other than those above regarding the items
equivalent to those shown below.

They explain to the applicants the necessary matters, emphasizing for


instance that their replies are reasonable from the viewpoint of
technology and economy.

1. Power producer
・ Possibility of system interconnection for the receiving power
requested by the applicant for interconnection examination
・Outline of system interconnection construction
・Roughly estimated construction cost and its basis
・Roughly estimated contribution to construction cost
・Required construction period
・Countermeasure required for a power producer
・Preconditions
・Restriction on operation

2. End-use customer
・ Possibility of system interconnection for the supply power
requested by the applicant for interconnection examination
・Outline of system interconnection construction
・Roughly estimated contribution to construction cost
・Required construction period
・Countermeasure required for an end-use customer
・Preconditions
・Restriction on operation

When generation facilities (excluding those for emergency and those not
interconnected to power systems) are installed at locations of demand,

40
measures required for those system interconnections are also explained.

41
Section 6. How to determine the preparatory period for end-use customers
TDSVIUs classify the preparatory period, i.e. the period from the
acceptance of application to commencement of the actual wheeling
service, into several types based on the nature of construction work
necessary for the start of wheeling services. This classification takes
into account various conditions such as the necessity of meter change,
introduction of automatic meter reading system, and installation of
communication lines required for the support system for load following.
TDSVIUs establish and make public the standard preparatory periods
for some typical types.

When a wheeling service cannot be commenced within the publicized


standard preparatory period, TDSVIUs also explain the reason to the
applicant.

42
Section 7. Basic approach to constructing facilities between existing
transmission facilities and facilities of power producer and
end-use customers
When TDSVIUs conduct an interconnection examination, they need to
develop an efficient and rational transmission system, ranging from
facilities of power producers and end-use customers right down to
existing transmission facilities owned by VIUs and so forth. They must
also maintain system supply security. Therefore, TDSVIUs establish
and make public the detailed requirements necessary to determine the
system configuration and scale of facilities as follows.

1. Connecting point with existing transmission facilities and


transmission route
TDSVIUs choose a connecting point with existing facilities and
transmission route by considering the following items.

a. Future outlook
・Future system configuration
・Trend of demand distribution, etc.

b. Site and environment


・Natural conditions
・Coordination with social environment
・Difficulty of site acquisition
・Influence of various disasters, etc.

c. Construction/maintenance
・Difficulty of construction/maintenance, etc.

d. Economy
・Construction cost, etc.

TDSVIUs explain the reason for the choice of a connecting point with
existing transmission facilities and transmission route to applicants for
interconnection examination individually.

43
2. Receiving/servicing voltage
TDSVIUs establish and make public the standardized voltages
according to a contract power and a contract receiving power.

When selecting receiving/servicing voltages, TDSVIUs choose them


with the above voltages as a yardstick, taking into account the state of
transmission facilities, and the specific situation of power producers
and end-use customers.

When TDSVIUs choose voltages other than standard ones, they explain
the selected receiving/servicing voltages and reasons for their selection
to applicants for interconnection examination individually.

3. Number of circuits
When TDSVIUs choose the number of circuits of transmission lines
connecting facilities of power producers and end-use customers with
existing transmission systems owned by VIUs and so forth, in principle
they choose one circuit (or two if so requested by power producers or
end-use customers as supplemental transmission facilities).

However, this principle may not apply under the following conditions:

・The failure of one circuit could have a serious influence (*1) on the
power systems operated by the TDSVIUs.

TDSVIUs establish and make public how to choose options other than
those based on the principle.

TDSVIUs explain the selected number of circuits and the reason for
selection to an applicant for interconnection examination individually.

(*1) Serious influence: Drastic fluctuations of the system frequency and


other problems, the degree of impact depending on system capacity
and reserve capacity

4. Scale of facility to be developed


When TDSVIUs choose the scale of facilities to be developed which

44
connect facilities of power producers and end-use customers with
existing transmission systems owned by VIUs and so forth, in principle
they choose the smallest scale that allows transmission of the contract
power and contract receiving power, by taking into account the
following items:

・ Thermal limit
・ Voltage drop
・ Stability
・ Phase/ground fault current

TDSVIUs explain the selected scale of facilities and the reason for
selection to the applicants for interconnection examination individually
if the smallest scale has not been chosen.

5. Type of transmission line


When TDSVIUs choose the type of transmission line connecting
facilities of power producers and end-use customers with existing
transmission systems owned by VIUs and so forth, in principle they
choose overhead transmission lines from the viewpoint of economy.
However, underground cables may be chosen under the following
conditions:

・ Difficulty in constructing overhead transmission lines due to


reasons of law, technology, site, and economy

TDSVIUs establish and make public how to choose options other than
these based on the principle.

If system interconnections use lines other than overhead lines,


TDSVIUs also explain the reason to the applicant.

45
Section 8. Policy for technical requirements for interconnection of
generation facilities
Technical requirements for system interconnection of generation
facilities are as follows. The requirements apply regardless of the
existence or nonexistence of reverse power flow (*1) when a generation
facility is installed at an end-use customer.

(*1) “Reverse power flow” means a power flow from the yard where
generation facilities are installed to the power systems, when the
output of the generation facilities is larger than the demand power
in the yard.

1. Electric system
If a generation facility with a different electric system is interconnected
with existing power systems, it may disrupt the use of electricity or
electric facilities for others.

When interconnecting generation facilities, their electric system uses an


alternating-current (AC) three-phase and three-wire system, with its
voltage and frequency being the same as those of the interconnected
power systems.

2. Generator constants
When generation facilities are interconnected, an increase in the fault
current of power systems may make the capability of facilities in series
such as circuit breakers insufficient or affect the stability of power
systems and so forth.

TDSVIUs specify the required constants of a generator and the required


constants and specifications of a step-up transformer to the applicants
for system interconnection of generation facilities if measures for
phase/ground fault current, stability, and so forth are necessary.

They also explain the reason for their specifications to the applicants for
system interconnection of generation facilities.

46
3. Power factor
When interconnecting generation facilities, the maintenance of
appropriate system voltage requires controlling reactive power in
coordination with the generation facilities of VIUs and others.
“Maintenance of appropriate system voltage” described above means
the maintenance of a bus voltage of substation within the ranges of
targeted operation voltages.

In case of system interconnection of new generation facilities, the power


factor of the generation facilities is as follows.

The power factor of generation facilities is to be more than 0.9 in lagging


and more than 0.95 in leading as a standard, within which those
facilities can operate with stability. When power factors are different
from the standard depending on the scale of power systems, distribution
of generation facilities, and so forth, TDSVIUs establish and make
public those power factors.

When a reverse power flow does not exist, the power factor of generation
facilities at the servicing point of end-use customers is in principle to be
0.85 or more in lagging power factor in order to prevent voltage drops.
Further, a leading power factor should be avoided for the power systems
(a lagging power factor when viewed from generation facilities).

4. Operable frequency of generation facilities


When the system frequency fluctuates due to contingencies on the
power systems, it causes the disconnection of generators, further
increasing frequency fluctuations and leading to a cascading
disconnection of other generators and finally catastrophic failure of the
power systems.

To prevent the generation facilities interconnected with power systems


from becoming disconnected one after another within the upper/lower
limits of frequency, the operable frequency range should be set in
coordination with the system frequency management/control system of
VIUs.

47
The operable frequency range of generation facilities interconnected
with power systems should be specified by TDSVIUs. TDSVIUs
establish and make public the operable frequency range of generation
facilities coordinated with the system frequency management/control
system.

5. Measures for voltage fluctuation


When the system voltage cannot be maintained at a proper level due to
voltage fluctuations on power systems associated with system
interconnection of generation facilities, the operation of facilities may be
disrupted.

Those who interconnect a generation facility with power systems


implement the following measures for voltage control in principle in
order to prevent the system voltage from deviating from the appropriate
value when system interconnection takes place.

・If the system voltage may deviate from the proper value (within
about 1 to 2% of the normal voltage) due to system interconnection
of generation facilities, it ought to be controlled automatically.
・When using synchronous generators, they should come with a
damping winding function (including a synchronous generator
without damping winding that can prevent hunting as well as or
more than the damping winding type). Automatic synchronism
detection devices should also be installed. Besides, when induction
generators are used, if the system voltage may deviate from the
proper value (estimated as 2% of the normal value) due to the
voltage dip while being paralleled in, current limiting reactors or
similar devices need to be installed. However, if such measures are
still ineffective, synchronous generators will be necessary.

・When self-commutated inverters are used, they need to have an


automatically synchronizing function. Besides, when
line-commutated inverters are used and yet the system voltage
may deviate from the proper value (estimated as 2% of the normal
value) due to voltage dip while being paralleled in, current limiting
reactors or similar devices need to be installed. If such measures

48
are still ineffective, self-commutated power inverters will be
necessary.

When it is necessary to implement measures coordinated with power


systems, such as installation of an on-load tap changer and voltage
fluctuation control to counter magnetizing inrush current, TDSVIUs
establish and make public details of these measures and the concept
behind them.

6. Measures for power quality


If power quality is affected by the system interconnection of generation
facilities, it may disrupt the use of electricity and electric facilities for
others.

Therefore, those who interconnect a generation facility with power


systems take appropriate measures to prevent deviation from the
standard value of power quality due to its system interconnection.

6-1 Harmonic suppression measures


As systems are interconnected with generation facilities, an inflow of
harmonic current into power systems may cause a harmonic strain on
the voltage wave form of power systems, damaging electric facilities as a
result.

Therefore, those who interconnect a generation facility with power


systems take necessary measures against harmonics during system
interconnections according to either of the following policies:

(1) Harmonic suppression measures in conformity with facilities of


end-use customers
When taking harmonic suppression measures in conformity
with facilities of end-use customers, Paragraph 1-1 of Section 9
“Measures for harmonic suppression” is applied.

(2) Individual harmonic suppression measures for generation


facility
When an inverter is installed, a harmonic inflow current from a

49
converter itself into power systems (including a filter) is to be
less than 5% of the integrated current strain and 3% of each
harmonic current strain.

TDSVIUs establish and make public the policies concerning


suppression measures for harmonic inflow current into power
systems according to (1) or (2).

6-2 Other measures for power quality


When there are demand facilities, Paragraph 1 of Section 9 “Measures
to secure power quality” applies to them.

7. Measures for stability


If the stability of power systems cannot be maintained, its influence
may be extensive.

When generation facilities interconnected with special high-voltage


lines and operation control is necessary for system stability, an
appropriate operation control system needs to be installed at generation
facilities. It is established as a standard that the operation control
systems specified by TDSVIUs as shown below are installed:

・ Power system stabilizer (function of power system stabilizer,


function of automatic voltage regulator of high-response excitation)
・Power shedding system

However, when measures other than those above are necessary,


TDSVIUs establish and make public their details and policies.

8. Countermeasures for phase/ground fault current


When a generation facility interconnects with power systems, the short
circuit capacity increases, causing the phase/ground fault current to
exceed the circuit breaking capability of existing circuit breakers. As a
result, the circuit may not be broken during contingencies, necessitating
some preventive measures.

If the short-circuit capacity of power systems increases and a phase

50
fault current may exceed the circuit breaking capability of other circuit
breakers as generation facilities interconnect with the systems, those
who interconnect generation facilities with power systems need to
install a device to limit the phase fault current (for example, a current
limiting reactor). If such measures are still ineffective, other
short-circuit capacity countermeasures including interconnection to
different substations and transmission lines of higher voltage will have
to be taken.

If the ground fault current is larger than the phase fault current in the
power systems using a neutral point solidly grounding method and so
forth, the same measures as those above need to be taken for the ground
fault current.

9. Protective relay system


Protective relay systems required for the system interconnection of
generation facilities need to be coordinated with those of interconnected
power systems and others from the viewpoint of human/society security,
power systems security, protection of electric facilities from damage,
and efficient development of transmission facilities.

It is established as a standard that the following protective relay


systems are to be installed. When there are demand facilities, this
technical requirement applies to them.

a. To protect power systems from generation failures, protective


relays are installed as follows:

・An over-voltage relay capable of detecting an abnormal rise in the


voltage of generation facilities and disconnecting these generation
facilities from power systems within a specified duration of time is
installed. However, installation of such a relay can be omitted if the
generator itself has detection and protection functions.
・An under-voltage relay capable of detecting an abnormal drop in
the voltage of generation facilities and disconnecting them from
power systems in a specified duration of time is installed. However,
installation of such a relay can be omitted if the generator itself

51
has detection and protection functions.

b. To protect power systems from a phase fault, the following


protective relays are installed:

・When synchronous generators are in use, a short-circuit directional


relay capable of detecting the short circuiting of the interconnected
systems and disconnecting the generation facilities from the power
systems is installed. When the relay thus installed cannot function
effectively, a short-circuit directional distance relay or current
differential relay is employed.
・ When induction generators or inverters are in use, an
under-voltage relay capable of detecting any abnormal voltage drop
of generators and disconnecting them from the interconnected
power systems in case of a short circuit in the interconnected
power systems is installed.

c. To protect power systems from a ground fault, a current


differential relay is installed when a neutral point solidly
grounding method is employed. Furthermore, a ground fault
over-voltage relay is installed when a method other than the
neutral point solidly grounding method is in use. If such a relay
cannot function effectively, a ground fault directional relay or
current differential relay is installed. However, if any of the
following conditions can be satisfied, it is not necessary to install a
ground fault over-voltage relay.

・A ground fault of the interconnected systems can be detected by a


ground fault over-voltage relay installed at the outlet of the
generator;
・The output of the generation facilities is smaller than the site load
and islanding can be detected and disconnected quickly by an
under-frequency relay; or
・Islanding can be detected and disconnected quickly by a reverse
power relay, under-voltage relay or a passive separating device
with an islanding preventing function.

52
d. If there is a reverse power flow, in order to prevent islanding that
deviates from the proper voltage and frequency, an over-frequency
relay and under-frequency relay or transfer tripping protection is
installed. Note that the characteristics of the over-frequency
relay and under-frequency relay are to be impervious to voltage
fluctuations.

e. If there is no reverse power flow, in order to prevent islanding, an


over-frequency relay and under-frequency relay are installed.
However, if the output capacity of generation facilities is balanced
with the load of the power systems and an over-frequency relay or
an under-frequency relay may not be able to detect/protect the
islanding, a reverse power relay is installed.

In addition, the following protective relay systems are installed if


necessary:

a. On site protection
In order to keep an on-site failure from extending into
interconnected systems, an over-current relay is installed for an
on-site phase fault and a ground fault over-current relay is
installed for an on-site ground fault.
If these protective relays cannot coordinate with those of
transmission systems, other protective relays such as bus
protective relays and ratio differential relays for step-up
transformer protection are installed.

b. Way to keep failure from spreading during step-out


In order to prevent a fault from spreading to other areas at the
time of step-out, an out-of-step protection relay is installed.

c. Use of multiple protective relay and so on


To improve system security, the following measures are employed
in compliance with VIUs’ standards: use of a duplex protective
relay, a combination of back-up protection, and automatic reclosing
protection.

53
TDSVIUs establish and make public the standard protective relay
systems and the policies for their additional installation.

10. Neutral point grounding device, preventive measures for obstacles to


electromagnetic induction
It is possible that not only an abnormal voltage occurs, but also that a
line-to-ground fault may not be detected at the time of a line-to-ground
fault in power systems.

Therefore, when neutral point grounding is required for interconnection


with special high-voltage lines, those who interconnect generation
facilities with power systems need to install a grounding device at a
neutral point of the transformer.

As the necessity for installing a neutral grounding device and its


specifications vary depending upon the voltage/state of interconnected
systems, TDSVIUs examine how an abnormal voltage occurs at the time
of a line-to-ground fault and specify a neutral grounding device if
necessary. The neutral grounding system complies with Paragraph 2 of
Section 3 Chapter 2 “Neutral grounding system”.

A ground return direct current occurs at the time of a line-to-ground


failure in neutral point grounding systems, causing electromagnetic
induction and induced voltages on the neighboring communication lines.
These induced voltages may cause security problems, such as an
adverse effect on communication lines and accidents such as electric
shocks involving communication line workers.

If it becomes necessary to implement an electromagnetic induction


preventive measure because of the installation of a neutral grounding
device, those who interconnect generation facilities with power systems
need to take appropriate measures.

11. Automatic load/power shedding device


At the time of a loss of generation, stoppage of one circuit of two-circuit
transmission lines and other problems, the interconnected transmission
facilities may become overloaded.

54
If the interconnected transmission lines may become overloaded mostly
at the time of a loss of generation and other problems, those who
interconnect generation facilities with power systems need to take
appropriate measures to automatically limit the load.

If the facilities are interconnected with special high voltage lines, an


overload detection device is to be installed, if necessary, for power
shedding.

12. Device to confirm no-voltage on transmission line


When generation facilities are interconnected with power systems, a
device to confirm no-voltage on transmission lines needs to be installed
in order to prevent a failure caused by an asynchronous interconnection
at the time of automatic reclosing.

Therefore, if a device to confirm no voltage on transmission lines is not


installed at the outlet of an outgoing line from a substation of power
systems, such a device needs to be installed at that outlet in order to
prevent a failure at the time of automatic reclosing.

However, if a reverse power flow does not exist and a protective relay,
current transformer, voltage transformer, circuit breaker and wiring of
power source for control concerning the system interconnection are
made in dual series and sequential so that they can be mutually backed
up, it is not necessary to install a voltage confirmation device. The
above-mentioned dual systems can be simplified using one or more of
the following methods:

a. The protective relays of one of the above-mentioned dual systems


can be made of the under power relays only;
b. A current transformer can be combinedly used in the 1st and 2nd
series when an under-power relay is installed at the end of it; or
c. A voltage transformer can be combinedly used in the 1st and 2nd
series when an under-voltage relay is installed at the end of it.

55
13. Telephone facility for security communication
When a circuit breaker for system interconnection is activated due to an
on-site failure, problem with power systems and so forth, those who
operate generation facilities and TDSVIUs communicate with each
other promptly and accurately.

Telephone facilities for security communication (such as private


telephone lines for security communication and leased lines exclusively
for the telecommunications industry) need to be installed between these
two parties. However, telephone facilities for security communication
are allowed to use any subscriber phones or cellular phones if
interconnected with a special high voltage line not exceeding 35,000V
and all the following conditions are satisfied:

・A system capable of direct communication with engineers without


using the exchanger of generation facilities operators is introduced
(not a switchboard number system through the exchanger, but a
single number system directly connected to the technical office)
and is always at the place of maintenance/supervision of
generation facilities;
・A system capable of interrupting even when a call is being made
(for example, catch-phone system) is introduced;
・A system that remains communicable even during outage; and
・It is clearly specified in safety regulations that if communication
with the TDSVIU cannot be made in the event of a disaster or
accident, generation facilities are disconnected or cease to operate
until communication with it is restored.

TDSVIUs establish and make public detailed requirements for


telephone facilities for security communication as it may become
necessary to specify duplex telephone lines or a kind of telephone
facilities from the viewpoint of reliability and economy.

14. Dispatching data transmission equipment


TDSVIUs must possess information required for system security,
facility security, and worker safety. Therefore, TDSVIUs and generation
facilities operators need to exchange necessary information with each

56
other.

When interconnected with special high voltage lines, supervisions and


telemeters are installed between these two parties so that information
necessary for system operations can be exchanged if necessary.

Paragraph 3 of Section 9 “Dispatching data transmission equipment”


applies when there are no reverse power flows.

(1) Communication system


TDSVIUs establish and make public the communication systems
coordinating with existing systems.

(2) Information items to collect


TDSVIUs establish “Standard information items to collect”
including all the items in the attached Table 3-3.

They also establish “Standard information items to collect” or


“Information items to collect according to conditions of system
interconnection” concerning the items in the attached Table 3-4
and can collect them. They establish and make public the
following items:

・The purpose of collecting the items when items other than those
shown in the attached Table 3-3 are designated as “Standard
information items to collect”
・The conditions of system interconnection and the purpose of
collecting the items when they are designated as “Information
items to collect according to conditions of system
interconnection”

TDSVIUs explain to those who interconnect generation facilities with


power systems why “Information items to collect according to conditions
of system interconnection” are necessary.

57
Section 9. Policy for technical requirements for interconnection of demand
facilities
A technical requirement for the system interconnection of demand
facilities is shown below. Note that electric systems and telephone
facilities for security communication apply under Section 8 “Policy for
technical requirements for interconnection of generation facilities”.

1. Measures to secure power quality


Deterioration of power quality due to system interconnection of demand
facilities may disrupt the use of electricity and electric facilities for
others.

Therefore, those who interconnect demand facilities with power systems


need to take measures to prevent deviation from a standard value
concerning power quality during system interconnection.

1-1 Measures for harmonic suppression


The inflow of harmonic current into power systems due to system
interconnection of demand facilities may cause a harmonic strain on a
voltage wave form of power systems, damaging electric facilities as a
result.

Therefore, those who interconnect demand facilities which generate


harmonic current with power systems need to take the following
measures for system interconnection.

(1) Scope
a. These measures must be taken by a party who satisfies either of
the following conditions (hereinafter referred to as “Specified
end-use customer”):

・A party who receives electricity from 22kV or 33kV power systems


and whose total capacity of harmonics, calculated by considering
the harmonics generation probability by facility type (hereinafter
referred to as “Equivalent capacity”) exceeds 300kVA
・A party who receives electricity from power systems over 66kV
and whose total equivalent capacity exceeds 2000kVA

58
b. Harmonics-generating facilities subject to the calculation of
equivalent capacity mentioned above are those other than devices
which come under the “Guideline of measures for reducing
harmonics from electrical appliances and multipurpose
appliances”.

c. The measures apply to a situation in which such


harmonics-generating facilities are newly installed, added, or
renewed by specified end-use customers.

Moreover, the measures also apply to a case where the end-use


customer becomes a specified end-use customer as a result of the
new installation, addition, or renewal of harmonics-generating
facilities.

(2) Calculation of inflow harmonic current


The inflow of harmonic current from a specified end-use customer
into power systems is calculated as follows.

・ The inflow harmonic current is obtained by totaling the


harmonic currents, which are generated by each
harmonics-generating facility operating at the rated output,
multiplied by the maximum rate of operation.
・ The inflow harmonic current is obtained by aggregating
harmonics of each order.
・Harmonics up to the 40th order shall be aggregated.
・When there is a facility reducing an inflow harmonic current on
the site of a specified end-use customer, its effect can be
considered.

(3) Upper limit of inflow of harmonic current


The permissible upper limit of an inflow harmonic current from a
specified end-use customer into power systems is obtained by
multiplying the permissible upper limit per 1kW of contract
power (attached Table 3-5) by the contract power of the specified
end-use customer concerned (unit: kW) for every harmonic.

59
(4) Measures to control inflow harmonic current
When the inflow harmonic current in Item (2) exceeds the upper
limit of the inflow harmonic current in Item (3), appropriate
measures need to be taken to keep the inflow harmonic current
below its upper limit.

1-2 Voltage fluctuation (voltage flicker)


As voltage fluctuations (voltage flicker) in power systems may impede
the use of electricity for others, a standard value needs to be
determined.

Those who interconnect demand facilities with power systems need to


take necessary measures in order to maintain the ΔV10 of voltage
fluctuation, a value equivalent to the 10Hz fluctuation for which
humans are most sensitive, below its standard level (the fourth
maximum data among one minute average Δ V10s continuously
measured for one hour is below 0.45V).

1-3 Others
When measures to maintain power quality other than those mentioned
above need to be taken, TDSVIUs clarify their details and reasons and
establish and make public those measures.

2. Protective relay system


Protective relay systems, which are required for system interconnection
of demand facilities, need to be coordinated with those of interconnected
power systems from the viewpoint of human/society security, power
systems security, protection of electric facilities from damage, and
efficient development of transmission facilities.

It is established as a standard that the following protective relay


systems are installed.

a. On-site protection
In order to prevent on-site failures from affecting interconnected

60
systems one after another, an over-current relay is installed
against an on-site phase fault and a ground fault over-current
relay for an on-site ground fault.

If these protective relays cannot coordinate with those of


transmission systems, other protective relays such as bus
protective relays and ratio differential relays for step-up
transformer protection are installed.

b. Protection of power system from phase/ground faults


When these protective relays need to coordinate with those of
transmission systems, other protective relays such as transverse
differential relays and current differential relay are installed.

c. To make protective relay multiple and so on


To improve system security, the following measures are employed
in compliance with VIUs’ standard: use of a duplex protective
relay and a combination of back-up protection. An automatic
reclosing protection is installed if requested by those who
interconnect demand facilities with power systems.

TDSVIUs establish and make public the standard protective relay


systems and policies for additional installation of protective relay
systems.

3. Dispatching data transmission equipment


TDSVIUs must possess the information required for system security,
facility security, and worker safety. Therefore, TDSVIUs and demand
facilities operators need to exchange the necessary information with
each other.

When interconnected with special high voltage lines, supervisions and


telemeters are installed between these two parties to exchange the
information necessary for system operations with each other.

(1) Communication system


TDSVIUs establish and make public the communication

61
systems coordinating with existing systems.

(2) Information items to collect


TDSVIUs establish “Standard information items to collect” or
“Information items to collect according to conditions of system
interconnection” concerning the items in the attached Table 3-6
and can collect them. They establish and make public the
following items:

・ The purpose of collecting items designated “Standard


information items to collect”.
・The conditions of system interconnection and the purpose of
collecting items designated “Information items to collect
according to conditions of system interconnection”.

TDSVIUs explain to those who interconnect demand facilities


with power systems why “Information items to collect according
to conditions of system interconnection” are necessary. In case
of system interconnection concerning wheeling service, PPS and
TDSVIUs discuss information items to collect if an application
for the wheeling service contract does not necessitate a change
in existing demand facilities.

62
Section 10. How to classify property and construction of
generation/demand facility
Network facilities right down to the receiving points where servicing
facilities of VIUs and electric facilities of power producers are connected
are classified as properties of VIUs that are responsible for their
construction regarding a basic approach to how property and
construction of generation facilities should be classified. This stance
also applies to the classification of property and construction for
demand facilities.

VIUs establish and make public in detail how to classify


property/construction of overhead service wires, underground service
cables, metering systems, dispatching data transmission systems, and
so forth concerning system interconnection between generation/demand
facilities and network facilities of VIUs to ensure fairness and
transparency.

63
Section 11. Declining an application for system interconnection
VIUs may refuse to accept the whole or part of applications for system
interconnection under unavoidable circumstances, such as laws and
ordinances, supply and demand situation, situation of servicing
facilities, and situation of payment of charges. In such cases, VIUs
explain the reasons for rejection to the applicants.

64
Section 12. Policy on sharing construction costs
VIUs need to make public how to determine the cost of construction to
be paid by an entity connected to power systems as follows.

VIUs establish and make public how construction costs are shared in
accordance with a wheeling service contract based on the provisions of
Article 24-3, Paragraph 1 of the Electricity Utilities Industry Law. The
fundamental policies are as follows.

When it becomes necessary to construct additional network facilities as


new contract power of wheeling service is concluded or increased, the
contractor concerned is in principle obligated to pay the amount in
excess of the limit of payment for VIUs (the average cost of facilities
covered by wheeling service charges) to ensure fairness of burden. This
is referred to as “payment by the causers”.

As for power supply lines, on the other hand, the causers in principle
pay the entire cost of construction, considering that the specified
entities will benefit. When several entities use the same power supply
line, in principle the expenses are to be paid in proportion to the rate of
use.

Details of the above and other matters comply with the wheeling service
contract.

The range of payment for power supply lines of VIUs complies with the
ministerial ordinance “Coverage of payment for power supply lines”.

65
Section 13. Fundamental policy for modification/withdrawal of
applications
When applicants for system interconnection or TDSVIUs offer to modify
the contracts concluded between them for constructing facilities
necessary for system interconnection for wheeling service, the
procedures are as follows.

1. When an applicant is offering


(1) Publication of work flow
TDSVIUs establish and make public the work flow of the applicant’s
offer to modify the contract. The standard work flow is shown in the
attached Paper 3-2.

(2) Modification of contract


a. When applicants wish to modify the contracts, they notify
TDSVIUs without delay.

b. When modifying the rated output power of generation facilities,


contract power, commencement date of wheeling service, and so
forth, the contracts are modified based on the publicized work
flow.

c. When withdrawing the contracts, they are dissolved based on the


publicized work flow.

2. When TDSVIUs are offering


(1) Publication of work flow
TDSVIUs establish and make public the work flow when they
offer to modify the contents of contracts, such as the
commencement date of wheeling service. The standard work
flow is shown in the attached Paper 3-2.

(2) Modification of contract


a. When TDSVIUs wish to modify contracts, they notify
applicants without delay.
b. TDSVIUs modify contracts based on the published work flow.

66
TDSVIUs establish and make public the work flow concerning system
interconnection of their own generation facilities and end-use customers
based on the attached Paper 3-2 as they follow the above management
procedures to ensure fairness and transparency.

They also establish and make public the work flow of modification and
withdrawal of the contracts concerning system interconnection of the
power producers other than those mentioned above, depending upon the
individual contract of each entity.

67
Attached Paper 3-1 Standard work flow from interconnection examination
to commencement of wheeling service
Applicant for interconnection TDSVIU

Application for interconnection Acceptance


examination

Interconnection examination

Acceptance of result of
Reply
interconnection examination

Application for contract(※) Acceptance

Interconnection examination
・Design of system interconnection
construction

Receiving of consent of service Reply (consent of service)

Conclusion of contract(※)

Conclusion of operation agreement and Construction of system


so forth(※) interconnection

Commencement of wheeling service

※ When the applicant for interconnection is a VIU (excluding its


transmission/distribution sector), “application of contract”, “conclusion of
contract” and “conclusion of operation agreement and so forth” refer to
“application for interconnection”, “decision on system interconnection
planning” and “application of in-house rules and so forth concerning
system operation”, respectively.

68
Attached Table 3-1 Information on generation facilities for interconnection
examination
a. Name of power producer, generation site and receiving point
Information on generation
facilities of system
Reason for request Notes
interconnecting power producer,
which TDSVIU requires
For management of
Name of power producer
interconnection examination
To specify the address of
generating site when
Address of generating site
choosing a route to
interconnecting facilities
For examination of
interconnecting facilities
Receiving point
(route of transmission,
interconnection)
For selection of a route to
interconnecting facilities, and
Ground plan, layout of facilities
for examination of facilities
formation

b. If power generating installations are located outside a franchised area of VIU, details of the

cross-area wheeling service of electricity contract concluded with a VIU other than the concerned VIU

necessary for the wheeling service or contents of an application


Information on generation
facilities of system
Reason for request Notes
interconnecting power producer,
which TDSVIU requires
Contents of cross-area wheeling
service of electricity contracts For examination of power
concluded with other VIUs flow

c. Generating system of generation facilities, output of generation facilities, detailed specifications of

generator, specifications of step-up transformer


Information on generation
facilities of system
Reason for request Notes
interconnecting power producer,
which TDSVIU requires
Outline of generation facilities
For comparison with details Submit in as much detail as
(rated output, number of units,
of generation facilities possible for existing facilities
type)
For examination of power
system stability and to check Include loaded/receiving
Single-line diagram
for conformity with technical facilities
requirements

69
Type of motor
For examination of power Submit in as much detail as
Overall generation facilities
(steam turbine, gas turbine,
system stability possible for existing facilities
diesel engine, etc.)
Type of generator
(synchronous generator, Same as above Same as above
induction generator)
To judge the type of submitted
(Existing or new/addition) data, according to existing or
new/added
For examination of
Rated voltage phase/ground fault current,
system stability and voltage
Rated capacity Same as above
For examination of power
Rated output power flow and power system
stability
For examination of power
Number of units flow, system stability and
phase/ground fault current
To check conformity with
Submit in as much detail as
Power factor (rating) technical requirements and
possible for existing facilities
for examination of voltage
Power factor (operable
Same as above Same as above
range)
For examination of power
Use of damping coils
system stability
To check up conformity with Submit in as much detail as
Operable range of frequency
technical requirements possible for existing facilities
For examination of power
Excitation system
system stability
Use of power system
Same as above
stabilizer (PSS)
For examination of power
Use of automatic voltage
system stability and voltage
regulator (AVR)
fluctuation
Constants of automatic
Same as above
voltage regulator (AVR)
For examination of power
Constants of governor
system stability
Type of inverter (when in To check conformity with Submit in as much detail as
use) technical requirements possible for existing facilities
Point of synchronizing
Same as above
parallel in/off
For examination of power
Saturation characteristic of
system stability and
a generator
phase/ground fault current
To check conformity with
Use of automatic technical requirements and
synchronism detector for examination of voltage
fluctuation

70
For examination of power
Direct-axis transient
Synchronous generator
system stability,
reactance
phase/ground fault current
and voltage fluctuation
Direct-axis sub transient
reactance Same as above

Direct-axis synchronous For examination of power


reactance system stability
Quadrature-axis transient
Same as above
reactance
Quadrature-axis sub
Same as above
transient reactance
Quadrature-axis
Same as above
synchronous reactance
Armature leakage reactance Same as above
Inertia constants Same as above
Direct-axis transient
short-circuit time constants
Same as above
or direct-axis transient
open-circuit time constants
Direct-axis sub transient
short-circuit time constants
Same as above
or direct-axis sub transient
open-circuit time constants
Quadrature-axis transient
short-circuit time constants
Same as above
or quadrature-axis transient
open-circuit time constants
Quadrature-axis sub
transient short-circuit time
constants or quadrature-axis Same as above
sub transient open-circuit
time constants
Armature time constants Same as above
For examination of
Induction generator

phase/ground fault current


Locked rotor reactance and voltage fluctuation

Capacity of current-limiting
reactor Same as above

71
Step-up transformer For examination of power
system stability,
Rated voltage
phase/ground fault current
and voltage
Rated capacity Same as above
For examination of power
system stability,
Leakage impedance (based
phase/ground fault current,
on rated capacity)
voltage fluctuation and
protective relay scheme
Use of load tap changer For examination of voltage,
(number of taps, range of power system stability and
voltage control) phase/ground fault current

d. Maximum and minimum values of receiving power


Information on generation
facilities of system
Reason for request Notes
interconnecting power producer,
which TDSVIU requires

Maximum and minimum values For examination of power


of receiving power flow and system stability

e. Voltage at a receiving point


Information on generation
facilities of system
Reason for request Notes
interconnecting power producer,
which TDSVIU requires
For selection of voltage class
of interconnecting facilities
Voltage at receiving point
and route to interconnecting
facilities

f. Loaded/receiving facilities at power generation site


Information on generation
facilities of system
Reason for request Notes
interconnecting power producer,
which TDSVIU requires
Loaded facilities

For examination of power


Total capacity
flow

Total power factor For examination of voltage

72
Special facilities Existence of harmonics To check harmonics
sources suppression countermeasure
Reference materials on Submit in as much detail as
Same as above
harmonics possible for existing facilities
Existence of voltage For examination of voltage
fluctuation sources fluctuation
Reference materials on Submit in as much detail as
Same as above
voltage fluctuation possible for existing facilities
For examination of power
Power receiving transformer

system stability,
Rated voltage
phase/ground fault current
and voltage

Rated capacity Same as above

For examination of power


system stability,
Leakage impedance (based
phase/ground fault current,
on rated capacity)
voltage fluctuation and
protective relay scheme
Use of load tap changer For examination of voltage,
(number of taps, range of power system stability and
voltage control) phase/ground fault current
Phase modifying equipment

Unnecessary if phase
For examination of voltage
Type modifying equipment is
and reactive power
included in total power factor

Capacity on each voltage


class
Same as above Same as above
(extra high voltage, high
voltage, low voltage)

Total capacity Same as above Same as above


Protective device

To check conformity with


Generator protection
protection coordination,
(unit number, type, cut-off
protective relay scheme and
point)
so forth
Interconnection system
protection
Same as above
(unit number, type, cut-off
point)

Prevention of islanding (unit


Same as above
number, type, cut-off point)

Protection of private area


(unit number, type, cut-off Same as above
point)

73
g. Desired commencement date of wheeling service
Information on generation
facilities of system
Reason for request Notes
interconnecting power producer,
which TDSVIU requires
Desired commencement date of To decide annual conditions
wheeling service for technical examination
Desired commencement date of To check secured term of
operation of interconnecting construction of transmission
facilities and distribution system

h. Number of circuits (regular/standby)


Information on generation
facilities of system
Reason for request Notes
interconnecting power producer,
which TDSVIU requires
Number of circuits To decide number of circuits
(regular/standby) of interconnecting facilities

i. Name and address of applicant


Information on generation
facilities of system
Reason for request Notes
interconnecting power producer,
which TDSVIU requires

For management of result of


Name of applicant
interconnection examination

Name of representative applicant Same as above

Fundamental information for


Contact address
making contact

j. Name of an entity that receives electricity delivered through cross-area wheeling service of electricity,

and a point of delivery


Information on generation
facilities of system
Reason for request Notes
interconnecting power producer,
which TDSVIU requires
Name of an entity that receives
electricity delivered through For examination of power
cross-area wheeling service of flow
electricity, and a point of delivery

74
Attached Table 3-2 Information on end-use customer for interconnection
examination
a. Name of end-use customer, location of use of electricity and service point
Information on facilities of
end-use customer, which TDSVIU Reason for request Notes
requires

For management of
Name of end-use customer
interconnection examination
To specify the location of use
Location of use of electricity of electricity when choosing a
route to interconnecting
facilities
For examination of
interconnecting facilities
Service point
(route of transmission,
interconnection)
For selection of a route to
interconnecting facilities, and
Ground plan, layout of facilities for examination of facilities
formation

b. Contract power
Information on facilities of
end-use customer, which TDSVIU Reason for request Notes
requires

For examination of power


Contract power
flow

c. Voltage at servicing point


Information on facilities of
end-use customer, which TDSVIU Reason for request Notes
requires
For selection of voltage class
of interconnecting facilities
Voltage at servicing point
and route to interconnecting
facilities

75
d. Loaded/receiving facilities at location of use of electricity
Information on facilities of end-use
Reason for request Notes
customer, which TDSVIU requires
・Include protective relay
To check conformity with
Single-line diagram ・Include generation facilities,
technical requirements
if any
Loaded facilities

Total capacity For examination of power


flow

Total power factor


For examination of voltage
Special facilities

Existence of harmonics To check harmonics


sources suppression countermeasure

Reference materials on Submit in as much detail as


Same as above
harmonics possible for existing facilities
Existence of voltage For examination of voltage
fluctuation sources fluctuation
Reference materials on Submit in as much detail as
Same as above
voltage fluctuation possible for existing facilities
Power receiving transformer

For examination of
Rated voltage phase/ground fault current
and voltage

Rated capacity Same as above

For examination of
Leakage impedance (based on phase/ground fault current,
rated capacity) voltage fluctuation and
protective relay scheme
Phase modifying equipment

Unnecessary if phase
For examination of voltage
Type modifying equipment
and reactive power
included in total power factor

Capacity on each voltage class


(special high voltage, high Same as above Same as above
voltage, low voltage)

Total capacity Same as above Same as above

76
To check conformity with
Generator protection
Protective relay system
protection coordination, Submit if there are existing
(unit number, type, cut-off
protective relay system and so generation facilities
point)
forth
Interconnection system
protection
Same as above
(unit number, type, cut-off
point)

Prevention of islanding (unit Submit if there are existing


Same as above
number, type, cut-off point) generation facilities

Protection of private area


(unit number, type, cut-off Same as above
point)

e. Desired commencement date of wheeling service


Information on facilities of
end-use customer, which TDSVIU Reason for request Notes
requires
Desired commencement date of To decide annual conditions
wheeling service for technical examination
Desired commencement date of To check secured term of
operation of interconnecting construction of transmission
facilities and distribution system

f. Number of circuits (regular/standby)


Information on facilities of
end-use customer, which TDSVIU Reason for request Notes
requires
To decide the number of
Number of circuits
circuits of interconnecting
(regular/standby)
facilities

g. Name and address of applicant


Information on facilities of
end-use customer, which TDSVIU Reason for request Notes
requires

For management of result of


Name of applicant
interconnection examination

Name of representative applicant Same as above

Fundamental information for


Contact address
making contact

77
h. Generating system of generation facilities, output of generation, detailed specifications of generator,

specifications of step-up transformer


Information on facilities of end-use
Reason for request Notes
customer, which TDSVIU requires
Outline of generation facilities Submit in as much detail as
For comparison with details
(rated output power, number of possible for existing facilities
of generation facilities
unit, type)
To check the type of
Overall generation facilities

(Existing or new/increased) submitted data, according to


existing or new/increased
For examination of
Rated voltage phase/ground fault current
and voltage

Rated capacity Same as above

For examination of power


Rated output power
flow
For examination of power
Number of units flow and phase/ground fault
current
To check conformity with
Submit in as much detail as
Power factor (rating) technical requirements and
possible for existing facilities
for examination of voltage

Power factor (operable range) Same as above Same as above

Same as above
To check conformity with
Operable range of frequency
technical requirements

Type of inverter (if an


Same as above Same as above
inverter is used)
Point of synchronizing
Same as above
parallel in/off
Saturation characteristic of a For examination of
generator phase/ground fault current
To check conformity with
Existence of automatic technical requirements and
synchronism detector for examination of voltage
fluctuation
Synchronous generator

For examination of
Direct-axis transient
phase/ground fault current
reactance
and voltage fluctuation

Direct-axis sub transient


reactance Same as above

78
Induction generator
For examination of
Locked rotor reactance phase/ground fault current
and voltage fluctuation

Capacity of current-limiting
Same as above
reactor

For examination of
Step-up transformer

Rated voltage phase/ground fault current


and voltage
Rated capacity Same as above
For examination of
Leakage impedance (based phase/ground fault current,
on rated capacity) voltage fluctuation and
protective relay scheme

79
Attached Table 3-3 Information items that must be collected

Dispatching data
Information items
transmission equipment

supervisions Circuit breaker Drop point of transmission line

Telemeter Active power Receiving point

80
Attached Table 3-4 Examples of information items to collect when
necessary

Dispatching data
transmission Information items
equipment
For interconnection of generator
Circuit breaker To collect depending on composition of facilities
・Bus connection ・For transformers
Drop point of transmission line, and state of its locking
Disconnector operation
To collect depending on composition of facilities
・Bus side of circuit breaker for drop point of transmission
line
・Bus connection ・For transformers
Earthing Switch Drop point of transmission line
supervisions
Indication of transmission protection and protection status
Protective relay (Active indication of cable fault section detecting system, in
case of cable section)
Indication of protection that opens interconnection circuit
breakers such as bus protection, substation protection,
islanding protection and so forth
Indication of protection that opens circuit breakers for
generators to be parallel in
Alert of protective relay system problem concerning
interconnection
Active power Each generator
Reactive power Receiving point
Each generator
*Electric energy Receiving point
Telemeter
Bus voltage
Bus frequency
Tap point of step-up transformer
(in case of transformer with LTC)
*Electric energy must be collected by an automatic meter reading system and so on for monitoring of

load following, if it is not collected by dispatching data transmission equipment.

81
Attached Table 3-5 Maximum harmonic current per 1kW of contract power

(mA/kW)
Receiving 5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd Over
voltage 23rd
22kV 1.8 1.3 0.82 0.69 0.53 0.47 0.39 0.36

33kV 1.2 0.86 0.55 0.46 0.35 0.32 0.26 0.24

66kV 0.59 0.42 0.27 0.23 0.17 0.16 0.13 0.12

77kV 0.50 0.36 0.23 0.19 0.15 0.13 0.11 0.10

110kV 0.35 0.25 0.16 0.13 0.10 0.09 0.07 0.07

154kV 0.25 0.18 0.11 0.09 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.05

220kV 0.17 0.12 0.08 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.03

275kV 0.14 0.10 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.02

82
Attached Table 3-6 Examples of information items to collect when
necessary

Dispatching data Information items


transmission
equipment
Circuit breaker Drop point of transmission line
Disconnector Drop point of transmission line, and status of its locking
operation
Earthing switch Drop point of transmission line
Protective relay Indication of transmission protection
supervisions (Active indication of cable fault section detecting system, in
case of cable section)
Indication of protection that opens interconnection circuit
breakers such as bus protection, substation protection and
so forth
Active power Service point
Telemeter Reactive power Same as above
*Electric energy Same as above
*Electric energy must be collected by an automatic meter reading system and so on for monitoring of

load following, if it is not collected by dispatching data transmission equipment.

83
Attached Paper 3-2 Work flow for modification/withdrawal of application

[Work flow when applicant for interconnection modifies the application]


Applicant for interconnection TDSVIU

Application for modification Acceptance

Examination based on the application


・Feasibility
・ Necessity of modification of
construction
・Construction cost and so forth

Receiving Reply

※ Application for
Acceptance
modification of contract

※Renewal of contract

[Work flow when applicant for interconnection withdraws the application]


Applicant for interconnection TDSVIU

Application for withdrawing Acceptance

Examination based on the application


・Management of existing facilities and
so forth
・Construction cost and so forth

Receiving Reply

※ Application for Acceptance


cancellation of contract

※Cancellation of contract

84
[Work flow when TDSVIU modifies the application]
Applicant for interconnection TDSVIU

Occurrence of factors of modification

Examination based on occurrence of


factors of modification
・ Necessity of modification of the
application
・Contents of the modification
・ Necessity of modification of the
contract and so forth

Receiving ※ Application for modification


of contract

※Renewal of contract

If the applicant for interconnection is a VIU (other than its


transmission/distribution sector), “contract” refers to “Decision on planning”
and so on.

85
【Appendix】 Glossary
“Transmission and distribution sector” is a generic name for the
transmission and distribution sector of VIU.

“Generation facility” is an electric facility installed to generate


electricity interconnected with power systems.

“Demand facility” is an electric facility installed to use electricity and


interconnected with power systems.

“Wheeling service” is a generic name for “Cross-area wheeling service of


electricity” and “Wheeling service of electricity”.

“Wheeling service of electricity” is a service under which VIU will


receive electricity from PPS (power producer and supplier) and at the
same time supply electricity through the supply facilities which VIU
maintains and operates at points other than the point where it has
received electricity, within its franchised area (in accordance with the
provisions of Article 24-4, Paragraph 1, of the Electricity Utilities
Industry Law).

“Cross-area wheeling service of electricity” is a supply service under


which VIU will receive electricity from a client and, at the same time,
supply the said client with electricity equivalent to the amount of
electricity received at an interconnected point other than the point
where it has received electricity.

“Interconnection examination” means that TDSVIU will examine plans


to construct new supply facilities or change existing facilities. (It
includes measures necessary for facilities owned by an applicant who
wishes to interconnect with the power systems.)

“System interconnection” means that power producers and end-use


customers connect their electric facilities with the power systems.

“Franchised area of VIU” means an area where VIU runs a business


permitted by the Minister of Economy, Trade, and Industry.

86
“Cross-area wheeling service of electricity contract” is a contract
concluded for the cross-area wheeling service of electricity.

“Contribution to construction cost” means a portion of the construction


cost to be paid by an applicant.

“Connecting point with existing facility” means the point of system


interconnection.

“Contract power” means a total quantity of kilowatt capacity that the


client can use under one or more than one contract.

“Contract receiving power” means a maximum of kilowatt receiving


power that the client can use at a receiving point under one or more
contract.

“Technical requirements for system interconnection” means


requirements to connect generation facilities and power receiving
facilities with the power systems.

“Load shedding” means automatic limitation of own load by those who


install generation facilities, when the loss of generation may cause the
connected transmission lines to overload.

“Power shedding” means control of generation output or generation


disconnection by installing an overload detection device or a transfer
tripping protection system when necessary, when the contingency on
transmission lines (e.g. one of two circuits develops an operational
problem) may cause a fault-free transmission line to overload.

“supervision” is a device that transmits and displays information on


facility monitoring, circuit breaker switching, protective relay operating,
etc.

“Telemeter” is a device that transmits and displays the measurement


value of voltage, current, power, etc.

87
“Metering systems” are composed of an “instrument transformer
(VCT)” which consists of current transformers and voltage transformers,
a “volt-ampere meter for transaction” that measures the amount of
electric energy and other meters.

“Dispatching data transmission equipment” is a device to transmit the


information necessary for power system operation.

“Load Following” means the adjustment of supply to match the demand.


PPS is requested to match supply and demand for 30 minutes.

“Support system for load following” provides PPS with 30-minute data
of its customer in order to contribute to load following.

“Automatic meter reading system” automatically collects the meter reading


data recorded using optical communication networks and others.

88
Chapter 4. Rule of power system operation (special high voltage: 22kV or
above)
Section 1. Policy for power system operation
TSVIUs establish the fundamental policy for their own power system
operation (excluding distribution system operation in this chapter) and
secure a stable operation of power systems.

Moreover, the transmission sector of WEUs (hereinafter referred to as


“TSWEU”) coordinates with system operations conducted by TSVIUs
and operates in their own control area within the control area of the
TSVIU concerned.

This section applies to the system operations conducted by TSVIUs and


TSWEUs.

1. System operation under normal conditions


1-1 Power system operation under normal condition
TSVIUs determine operational system configurations to maintain
system security as well as conduct system switching smoothly. When
power flows exceed or are likely to exceed the operating capacity of
transmission facilities by monitoring power flows and others, TSVIUs
take necessary measures and strive to achieve the stable operations of
power systems.

1-2 Operational system configuration


TSVIUs establish and make public the basic items described below
concerning operational system configurations under normal condition
after taking into account the following (1) “Fundamental items of
operational system configuration”:

・System configuration of transmission lines


System configuration of transmission lines according to system
voltage classes or trunk/local transmission system (loop system,
radial system)
・ Bus connection (how to connect every bus configuration) of
electrical stations
・How to operate multiple circuit transmission lines and several

89
transformers

(1) Fundamental items of operational system configuration


Power systems are configured considering maintenance of system
voltage/security, smooth switching with/without system
contingency, and reduction of transmission loss. Detailed system
configurations are determined considering the following:

a. All the power systems of VIUs are interconnected/operated in


principle.

b. Phase/ground fault currents do not exceed the circuit breaking


capability of circuit breakers and tolerable current values at
power facilities.

c. Neutral grounding devices are operated considering the


following:

・An abnormal voltage does not occur when system separation


causes un-grounding.
・Interference to communication lines caused by electromagnetic
induction does not occur.
・Ground fault protection relays operate securely.

d. The following are considered at the time of contingency:

・Overloading of transformer or transmission line due to a partial


loss of power systems and countermeasures
・Stability and voltage stability

1-3 System monitoring and control of power flow


TSVIUs establish and make public the policy for system monitoring and
control of power flows after taking into account (1) and (2) “System
monitoring” and “Control of power flow” below.

(1) System monitoring


TSVIUs always strive to have a firm understanding of the system

90
conditions, such as operations of generation and transmission
facilities, demand, system frequency, system voltage, power flows
through a system monitoring device, information from the entities
concerned, and so forth in order to operate power systems
appropriately and smoothly, prevent contingencies, and maintain
power quality.

(2) Control of power flow


TSVIUs control power flows in order to maintain appropriate
power quality as well as reduce transmission loss, taking into
account facilities and system security. When power flows exceed or
are likely to exceed the operating capacity of transmission facilities,
the operators control power flows within the operating capacity by
means of network switching of generation and demand. Moreover,
when power flows exceed or are likely to exceed the operating
capacity of transmission facilities even after network switching of
generation and demand, they control power flows by the following
means:

・Control the generation outputs of a generator which VIUs have


acquired and are committed in parallel to the power systems.
・Control the output of a generator of a power producer according
to the operation agreements during the scheduled outages of
transmission facilities and so forth, if necessary.

2. Operation under abnormal conditions


2-1 Advance procedures for abnormal condition
TSVIUs and the entities concerned strive to maintain stable power
system operation by preparing for possible contingencies in power
systems so that they can be prevented or kept from worsening.

TSVIUs establish and make public the policy for preventing


contingencies as well as preventing them from worsening, taking into
account (1) and (2), “Communication” and “Advance procedure” below.

(1) Communication
TSVIUs strive to collect information on natural disasters and other

91
problems, such as lightning, earthquake, strong wind, typhoon,
heavy rain, heavy snow, tsunami, freshet, fire, and salt
contamination, take necessary measures, and inform the entities
influenced by (2) Advance procedures of the contents of the
measures without delay through a fixed chain of communication.

In the following cases, the entities concerned provide the


information about those situations without delay through a chain
of communication determined by TSVIUs.

・It is detected that contingencies may occur in power systems.


・It is estimated that contingencies affecting the normal operation
of power facilities may occur, making it difficult to maintain
power quality.

(2) Advance procedures


When some adverse contingencies, such as salt contamination,
lightning, or snow accumulation may occur in the power systems,
TSVIUs strive to prepare the following preventive procedures and
keep these problems from worsening in advance if necessary,
paying close attention to local weather conditions and keeping
close contact with the entities concerned:

・Securing communication paths to the entities concerned


・Arranging with the entities concerned on ways to deal with
communication failure and contingencies
・Controlling power flow to prepare for system separations
・Changing the system configuration
・Canceling scheduled outage
・Performing preventive outage of power facilities
・Commencing operation of generation purchased by VIUs
・ Restarting transmission/distribution facilities stopped for
efficient operation

Moreover, when control of power flows requires power producers to


reduce their generation outputs, TSVIUs take the following
measures and explain the load dispatching instructions to the

92
power producers concerned:

・Transmission lines likely to experience adverse contingencies


are subject to load dispatching instructions.
・ Interconnections comply with Section 11 “Congestion
management”.
・Transmission lines within the control area also comply with
Section 11 “Congestion management”, but, as to local power
flow control, the generators with effective power flows
controlling on the transmission lines are subject to the load
dispatching instructions.

When the entities concerned consider there is such a risk of a


profound influence on human safety and society or damage to
power facilities due to electric shock, explosion, fire, flooding or
other causes that operations must be stopped, they can stop these
power facilities without delay without notifying TSVIUs. If this
happens, they are to notify TSVIUs as soon as possible.

2-2 Procedures for contingency


In case of adverse contingencies in power systems, TSVIUs and the
entities concerned grasp the exact state of contingencies and restore the
power systems safely and swiftly, while taking necessary measures to
secure the safety of workers and the integrity of power facilities and
reduce the severity of problems affecting the generation and power
supply.

Moreover, TSVIUs and the entities concerned control or cut off the
generation output of power producers or the demand of end-use
customers without delay if it is unavoidable in order to secure power
facilities and system security. In this case, in principle, priority is
placed on output increase for power producers, rather than load
control/shedding for end-use customers.

TSVIUs are responsible for explaining the load dispatching instructions


to the power producers and end-use customers concerned after
restoration from contingencies.

93
TSVIUs establish and make public the policy of procedures for
contingencies after considering the following (1) and (2) “Understanding
of abnormal conditions” and “Fundamental policy for restoration
procedures”.

(1) Understanding of abnormal conditions


TSVIUs determine whether urgent procedures are necessary or not
without delay, grasping the state of contingencies as follows as
they occur in power systems:

・TSVIUs grasp the state of contingencies accurately through


system monitoring devices, protective relay operations, and
reports from the entities concerned in the event of contingencies
in power systems.
・When abnormal conditions, such as large fluctuations of power
flows and system voltages in power systems, are monitored or
reported, TSVIUs investigate the causes immediately.

The entities concerned conduct the following procedures in the


event of contingencies in power systems:

・When circuit breakers trip, the entities concerned conduct fixed


independent operations and report the state of contingencies
and the result of the operations to TSVIUs.
・When abnormal conditions, such as large fluctuations of power
flows and system voltages in power systems even without
tripping of circuit breakers are observed, the entities concerned
report those conditions to TSVIUs.

(2) Fundamental policy for restoration procedures


TSVIUs restore the power systems with contingencies according to
the following policies.

a. Prior to system restoration, urgent procedures are taken


considering the following:

94
・Securing of human safety
・Securing of stability, voltage stability, and facility maintenance
・Prevention of outage from spreading
・Restoration of abnormal voltage to a normal level

b. Immediately after the above procedures, the following actions


are taken to restore the power systems to the pre-contingency
state:

・Automatic restoration by automatic reclosing protection and so


on
・ Independent restoration switching operation by the entities
concerned
・ Restoration switching operation under load dispatching
instructions

c. In the following situations, independent restoration switching


operation can be stopped and power systems can be restored by
load dispatching instructions:

・Inability to operate safely


・Contingency regarded as large-scale and complicated

d. The following measures are taken after restoration switching


operation:

・Procedures to relieve the facilities of overloading caused by


network switching of demand and so on
・Operation to regulate system voltage if it deviates from the
reference level
・ System operation to restore the system security after
restoration from contingency

The entities concerned can restore their facilities to the normal


situation from contingencies by independent/automatic switching
operation. However, if restoration is difficult by this method,
restoration will be done by load dispatching instructions.

95
(3) Control/shedding of generation output power, and demand in
restoration switching operation
TSVIUs control/shed the generation output power of power
producers or the demand of end-use customers within their control
areas in the following cases of restoration:

・Excess of operating capacity of transmission facilities


・Islanding due to contingencies of transmission facilities
・Difficulty in maintaining system stability or voltage stability
due to contingencies of transmission facilities
・Urgent need to stop transmission facilities for human safety and
security of facilities

Moreover, in principle, priority is placed on increasing the


generation output power. TSVIUs may also stop the power
facilities influencing power producers or end-use customers
without notifying them in case of emergency. In such a case,
TSVIUs inform the power producers and end-use customers
concerned promptly after the event.

The detailed procedures are as follows.

a. Excess of operating capacity of transmission facilities


<Policy>
If power flows exceed or are likely to exceed these operating
capacities due to the measures taken for abnormal conditions,
such as forced outages of generation and transmission facilities
and other problems, and these conditions cannot be cleared by
the network switching, TSVIUs control/shed the generation
output power of power producers or the demand of end-use
customers.

<Operation>
TSVIUs instruct the power producers and end-use customers on
load dispatching instructions as follows within the control areas
where the operating capacities are exceeded in order to clear the

96
problem effectively:

・TSVIUs give unbiased load dispatching instructions to power


producers when controlling/shedding generation output power.
・TSVIUs give unbiased load dispatching instructions to end-use
customers when controlling/shedding the demand.

b. Islanding due to contingencies of transmission facilities


<Policy>
When the contingencies of transmission facilities cause the power
systems to partially separate and become isolated, TSVIUs
control/shed the generation output power of power producers or
the demand of end-use customers if necessary in order to
maintain the system frequency and voltage at appropriate levels.

<Operation>
・ TSVIUs give a load dispatching instruction to control/shed
the generation output power of power producers or the demand
of end-use customers within an islanded system in order to
maintain the system frequency and voltage. Moreover, if it is
difficult to operate an islanded system, TSVIUs stop operating
the generators of power producers within an islanded system,
make the entire islanded system blackout and then restore the
system from the other power systems.
・ TSVIUs interconnect an islanded system with other power
systems after confirming that the system frequencies and
voltages of both power systems match. However, if it is difficult
to connect these systems, the entire islanded system is made
blackout once before restoring it from the power systems.

c. Difficulty in maintenance of stability or voltage stability due to


contingencies of transmission facilities
<Policy>
If it becomes or is likely to become difficult to maintain stability
or voltage stability due to the contingencies of transmission
facilities, TSVIUs control/shed the generation output power of
power producers or the demand of end-use customers if necessary

97
in order to maintain system security.

<Operation>
If it becomes or is likely to become difficult to maintain stability
or voltage stability, TSVIUs instruct the power producers or
end-use customers on the following load dispatching instructions
within their control areas in order to secure the power systems
effectively in principle.

・TSVIUs give unbiased load dispatching instructions to power


producers when controlling/shedding generation output power.
・TSVIUs give unbiased load dispatching instructions to end-use
customers when controlling/shedding the demand.

d. Necessity of urgent stop of transmission facilities for human


safety and security of facilities
<Policy>
When it is necessary to stop operating transmission facilities for
human safety and security of facilities in an emergency, TSVIUs
conduct network switching, shed the generation output power of
power producers, or shed the demand of end-use customers.

2-3 Procedure in case of scarce supply


(1) Measure to increase supply
When such factors as a shortage of water, a contingency, or a surge
in demand due to abnormally high or low temperature significantly
reduce the hot reserve (see Paragraph 5, Section 2 “Securing of hot
reserve”), thus upsetting or likely to upset the supply and demand
balance, TSVIUs increase the supply capability through the
following procedures in order to restore the supply and demand
balance by taking into account the trend of demand (e.g. increase
rate of demand) and the change of weather conditions.

a. Securing of supply capability of generation procured by VIUs

・Additional unit commitment of cold reserve (standby thermal


generators)

98
・Cancellation of scheduled outage that suppresses generation
output (including those on transmission/distribution facilities)
・Change and coordination of operation schedule of hydro power
generation
・Additional output from thermal power generation
・Operation of standby gas turbine generator

b. Procurement of supply capability from other power supplying


entities

・ Procurement of supply capability through power exchange


transactions
・ Purchase of power interchange for balancing supply and
demand
・Procurement of surplus power from PPSs and others within
control areas, etc.

(2) Requirement for power interchange for balancing supply and


demand
TSVIUs strive to secure the supply capability of generation
procured by VIUs, procure it through power exchange transactions,
and procure the surplus power from PPSs and others within those
control areas as mentioned above. If, despite all these efforts, the
hot reserve is or is assumed to be less than 3% of the maximum
demand for the day and so forth, TSVIUs can resort to a power
interchange for balancing supply and demand after the closing
time for submitting the schedule for the next day.

(3) Submission to ESCJ of data necessary for post-verification of


resorting to a power interchange for balancing supply and demand
TSVIUs resorting to a power interchange for balancing supply and
demand submit the data necessary for post-verification to ESCJ.

If necessary when performing post-verification, ESCJ can ask


TSVIUs to explain the details of data submitted, the basis for
calculating a hot reserve, and the like.

99
(Example of submission data)
・Supply and demand balance (e.g. forecast supply and demand
balance at the time of resorting to a power interchange for
balancing supply and demand and actual supply and demand
balance after receipt of power interchange for balancing supply
and demand)
・Details of measures taken for supply capability during scarce
supply
・Degree of use of power exchange transactions

(4) Demand control/shedding


TSVIUs control/shed the demand of end-use customers when
supply capability is still insufficient even after taking the above
procedures.

However, if time is short and so on, TSVIUs may control/shed the


demand of end-use customers before completing all the measures
to secure additional supply capability.

Moreover, TSVIUs not only take into account the social influence,
but also deal with all the LSEs in a fair manner when
controlling/shedding demand.

(5) Post-explanation
TSVIUs are responsible for explaining the load dispatching
instructions given to the power producers and end-use customers
concerned after resolving a scarcity of supply.

(6) Publication of rules of TSVIUs


TSVIUs establish and make public the policy of procedures for
scarcities of supply.

100
Section 2. Securing of regulating capability necessary for maintaining
power quality
TSVIUs determine the basic policy, method to secure regulating
capability, method of regulating and other relevant matters concerning
securing the regulating capability necessary for maintaining power
quality. They also strive to secure the stable operation of power
systems.

This section applies to the regulating capability secured by TSVIUs.

1. Regulating system frequency under normal conditions


1-1 Fundamental policy for frequency control under normal conditions
TSVIUs give a load dispatching instruction of increase, decrease, and/or
shut-down to the generators procured by VIUs or their control sections
in response to load fluctuations and keep the balance of supply and
demand. Moreover, TSVIUs secure the regulating capability of 1%–2%
of system capacity, modify the value of instructed generation output
corresponding to the load fluctuations in the control area through load
frequency control methods that vary from area to area, and strive to
maintain the system frequency within the standard range.

Moreover, even at the time of large fluctuations of demand, such as a


rapid increase in demand in the morning, TSVIUs strive to secure
sufficient regulating capability in order to maintain the system
frequency at the standard level.

1-2 Publication of TSVIUs’ rules


TSVIUs establish and make public the regulating capability necessary
for load frequency control and the method of securing it according to the
fundamental policy of this item, taking into account system capacity.

2. Regulating system frequency under abnormal conditions


2-1 Fundamental policy for frequency control under abnormal
conditions
If the system frequency significantly goes up or down due to a
generation outage, a rapid change of demand, or a system contingency,
or if the maintenance of system frequency continues or is likely to

101
continue to be difficult, TSVIUs control/shed the generation output of
power producers and the demand of end-use customers to maintain the
reliability of transmission system and the stable operation of generation.
Moreover, in principle, controlling/shedding the generation output of
power producers should take place prior to the other procedures.

TSVIUs also separate the interconnections in order to prevent abnormal


system frequency from spreading on a large scale if necessary.

2-2 Procedures for restoring system frequency


(1) Countermeasure on generation side
a. Considered items for load dispatching control
TSVIUs give load dispatching instructions on the
control/shedding of generation output for the generators of
power producers which are effective to restore the system
frequency depending upon the characteristics of machines, such
as regulating speed and capacity.

b. Order of priority of load dispatching


・Fundamental policy
TSVIUs give load dispatching instructions on the
control/shedding of generation output for the generators
procured by VIUs prior to the other generators. If the
maintenance of system frequency continues or is likely to
continue to be difficult, TSVIUs give load dispatching
instructions on the control/shedding of generation output for
the power producers within the control area concerned.

If the load dispatching instructions are given directly to power


producers, TSVIUs will immediately inform PPSs of the facts.

The power producers including PPS who were given the load
dispatching instructions will implement them to control/shed
the generation output power within the capability of those
facilities.

・Measures for system frequency increase in case of separation of

102
interconnection
TSVIUs, to deal with an increase in system frequency caused by
interconnection separation, specify the conditions for providing
load dispatching instructions for the control/shedding of the
generation output power of the power producers engaged in the
cross-area wheeling service of electricity by drawing up
operation agreements with the PPSs concerned.

・Measures for system frequency abnormality arising from other


control areas
TSVIUs control/shed the output power of the generators
procured by VIUs to autonomously restore the system
frequency from abnormality arising from power systems in
other control areas.

(2) Countermeasure on demand side


If the system frequency still falls even after completing the above
measures on the supply side or if there is little time to implement
them, TSVIUs control/shed the demand of end-use customers.

In the case of controlling/shedding the demand, TSVIUs not only


consider the social influence but also deal with all the LSEs in a
fair manner.

(3) Separation of interconnection


If the system frequency continues to fall or increase for more than
a certain period, TSVIUs separate interconnections to prevent the
tripping of generators from cascading.

2-3 Procedure after restoration of system frequency


(1) Load dispatching instruction on return to normal operation
TSVIUs not only put priorities on securing the stable operation of
power systems, but also give a load dispatching instructions to the
power producers and end-use customers, to whom load dispatching
instructions were given, on return to normal operation after the
system frequency has been restored.

103
(2) Post-explanation
TSVIUs are responsible for explaining the situation of the
increase/decrease of system frequency and the given load
dispatching instructions to the power producers and customers
concerned after a return to normal operation.

2-4 Publication of rules of TSVIUs


TSVIUs establish and make public the policies of regulating the
frequency under abnormal conditions, the procedures for restoring
system frequency, and the procedures after restoration of system
frequency according to the fundamental policy of this paragraph.

3. Reactive power voltage control under normal conditions


3-1 Fundamental policy for reactive power voltage control under normal
conditions
(1) Fundamental policy
TSVIUs determine the operating target of system voltage and
strive to maintain the appropriate system voltage and secure the
voltage stability of power systems.

They also strive to maintain the system voltage interconnected


with the other control areas within the target operating values.

TSVIUs determine the target operating values of system voltage by


taking into account the following:

・System configuration, generation allotment, and capacity of phase


modifying facilities
・ Reactive power voltage characteristics, load-voltage
characteristics, and performance of voltage regulation equipment
・Allowable voltage range of power system facilities
・Securing voltage stability
・ Maintenance of the voltage to end-use customers within the
allowable voltage range
・Maintenance of reactive power balance in power systems
・Reduction of transmission loss

104
(2) Regulation means
TSVIUs strive to control the system voltage, not only by monitoring it
and reactive power flows of power systems but also by anticipating
ever-changing load. Voltage regulation is done by the following means:

・Control of excitation system (leading, lagging)


・Control of on-load tap changer of transformer
・Reactive power control by means of phase modifying facilities (SC:
Shunt Capacitor, ShR: Shunt Reactor, SVC: Static var
compensator, etc.)
・Reactive power control by means of increasing or decreasing the
number of operating generators
・Change of system configuration
・Outage of transmission line while maintaining system security

Power producers control the voltage of generators in order to maintain


the systems voltage at the proper level.

(3) Request for cooperation


TSVIUs request end-use customers to open power factor
improvement capacitors to an appropriate degree if it is necessary
to regulate the system voltage when the load is light, such as
around the New Year or holiday season (between late April and
early May, at night, on holidays, etc.).

3-2 Publication of rules of TSVIUs


TSVIUs establish and make public the policy for reactive power voltage
control under normal conditions according to the fundamental policy of
this paragraph.

4. Control of reactive power voltage under abnormal conditions


4-1 Fundamental policy for reactive power voltage control under
abnormal conditions
When a system voltage falls or is likely to fall abnormally due to the
contingencies of generation and transmission facilities or the increase of
demand, TSVIUs strive to restore the system voltage to the targeted
level so as to secure voltage stability by the following means: reactive

105
power control of power producers’ generators, voltage regulation in
substations and the like, network switching, commencement of
operation of phase modifying facilities to supply reactive power, such as
shunt capacitors, and control/shedding of the demand of end-use
customers.

Moreover, regulation of a system voltage, such as regulation of reactive


power of power producers’ generators, in principle takes precedence
over other procedures.

4-2 Procedures for voltage restoration


(1) Regulation of system voltage
TSVIUs give load dispatching instructions on voltage regulation to
the electric stations and power producers concerned in order to
implement effective measures for preventing voltage decrease,
taking into account the local characteristics of reactive power
voltage, functions and performance of control equipment, and
regulating capability. If the system voltage continues to fall,
TSVIUs also request end-use customers to cooperate.

On receiving the load dispatching instructions, the electric stations


and power producers implement them to control the reactive power
of generators and operate phase modifying facilities within their
operable capabilities.

(2) Control/shedding shutting of demand


If the system voltage still falls even after regulating it or if there is
little time to implement the regulating measures, TSVIUs
control/shed the demand of end-use customers.

Moreover, TSVIUs not only take into account the social influence,
but also deal with all the LSEs in a fair manner when
controlling/shedding demand.

4-3 Procedure after restoration of system voltage


(1) Load dispatching instruction for return to normal operation
After the completion of appropriate control of the system voltage,

106
TSVIUs instruct the power producers and end-use customers who
have received the load dispatching instructions to return to normal
operation.

(2) Post-explanation
TSVIUs are responsible for explaining the situations of a system
voltage and the given load dispatching instructions to the power
producers and end-use customers concerned after completing the
procedures for the load dispatching instructions.

4-4 Publication of rules of TSVIUs


TSVIUs establish and make public the fundamental policy of
procedures for abnormal system voltages, the procedures for system
voltage restoration, and the procedures after system voltage restoration
according to the fundamental policy of this paragraph.

5. Securing of hot reserve


5-1 Securing of hot reserve
(1) Fundamental policy
In principle, TSVIUs strive to secure a hot reserve of at least
3%–5% of the maximum system capacity for the day or the amount
equivalent to a maximum capacity unit of generation in order to
maintain system security in control areas by taking into account
the following:

・ Errors in maximum demand prediction due to errors in


temperature forecast
・Generation outage due to contingency of power systems or its own
failure (e.g. problem with the generator whose capacity is
equivalent to the maximum capacity unit of generation in the
control area concerned)
・ Capacity benefit margin on interconnection (This means the
reserve capacity expected through interconnections when the
ratio of the amount equivalent to the maximum capacity unit of
generation is high in system capacity), etc.

Moreover, TSVIUs strive to increase the hot reserve when there

107
are concerns about the following: demand fluctuations due to rapid
changes in weather often observed during a lull in the rainy season,
contingencies in power systems due to salt contamination,
lightning, and snow accumulation.

(2) How to secure a hot reserve


TSVIUs strive to secure hot reserves using the generator procured
by VIUs by considering the characteristics of machines, such as the
ramping rate of output power and regulating capacity, and the
economics of supply and demand control (fuel types, etc.). The
following are considered:

・Reserve power of hydro/thermal power operating at partial output


・Hydro power under hot standby, including pumped storage hydro
・Emergency gas turbine generation

When it is necessary to increase a hot reserve, TSVIUs implement


the following:

・Additional unit commitment of cold reserve (standby thermal


power)
・ Cancellation of scheduled outage (including transmission
facilities) that requires the control of generation output power

5-2 Securing of spinning reserve


(1) Fundamental policy
In principle, TSVIUs strive to secure a spinning reserve of
approximately 3% of system capacity to cope with mismatches of
supply and demand for very short periods caused by instantaneous
fluctuations of demand, generation outage and other reasons.

(2) How to secure a spinning reserve


TSVIUs strive to secure spinning reserves as follows.

・Speed governor response of generation procured by VIUs


・Emergency interchange through a DC interconnection
・Shedding of load consumed by pumped storage operation at a

108
pumped storage hydro power station, etc.

5-3 Publication of rules of VIUs


TSVIUs establish and make public the policy for the necessary amount
of hot reserve and spinning reserve and the method of securing it based
on this paragraph.

109
Section 3. Generation schedule
This section describes procedures for submitting schedules,
specifications, and data from PPSs necessary for a supply-demand
control schedule drawn up by TSVIUs and those for publishing the
supply and demand balance in order to operate power systems stably
and in a fair manner within their own control areas.

PPSs are subject to these procedures for submission.

1. Submission of schedule
PPSs submit the following supply and demand plans, generation
schedules, and outage schedules for generation facilities necessary for
every time span of planning to a place determined by TSVIUs where
submission is accepted (hereinafter referred to as “PSA”).

(1) Supply and demand plans


PPSs make a supply and demand plan for each control area where
their demand exists and submit it to the PSA of the control area
according to Table 4-3-1.

(2) Generation schedule and outage schedule of generation facilities


PPSs make a generation schedule by power station and an outage
schedule of generation facilities for every control area where their
generation exists and submit it to the PSA of the control area
according to Table 4-3-2.

TSVIUs, after explaining the reason, can request PPSs to submit


specifications for planning and additional data other than the
items determined in Table 4-3-2 “Submission of generation
schedule and outage schedule of generation facilities” in order to
establish a supply-demand control schedule.

2. Change of schedule
PPSs are to implement the following if they change their supply and
demand plans and generation schedules in a way that influences the
system security management of TSVIUs or change them resulting from
coordination due to contingencies affecting system security, such as

110
forced or scheduled outages of transmission facilities of VIUs.

If the above change makes it necessary to modify the schedules of power


flow of interconnection and so forth, the procedures for this change are
subject to Section 10 “Rules for use of ISF”.

(1) Change in supply and demand plans


PPSs immediately submit to the PSA of the control area with
demand the items to be modified from among those in Table 4-3-1
concerning their own supply and demand planning subject to
Paragraph 1 “Submission of schedule”.

(2) Change in generation schedule and outage schedule of generation


facilities
PPSs submit to every PSA of the control area with generation the
items to be modified from among those in Table 4-3-2 concerning
their own generation schedule and outage schedule of generation
facilities subject to Paragraph 1 “Submission of schedule”.

3. Report/Publication concerning supply and demand balance


(1) Report of supply and demand balance in control area
TSVIUs report the supply and demand balance in a control area
(supply and demand by an area) to ESCJ according to Table 4-3-3
determined by ESCJ.

(2) Publication of forecast of supply and demand balance for the whole
country
ESCJ publicizes a forecast of the supply and demand balance for
the whole country (nationwide supply and demand) from Table
4-3-4 based on the supply and demand balance in the control areas
submitted by TSVIUs.

The forecast of the supply and demand balance for the whole
country is publicized using the system for publicizing of system
information (available only to members of ESCJ and registered
users of this system).

111
Table 4-3-1 Submission of supply and demand plans

Submitted Short-term schedule


schedule Annual schedule Monthly schedule Weekly schedule Schedule for the
(first & second (next month, the (next week, the next day
year) month after next) week after next)
Deadline Last day of First day of month Every Tuesday Every noon
October each
year
Forecasted Maximum/minim Maximum/minimu Maximum/minimu Energy (kWh)
value of um power (kW) m power (kW) by m power (kW) and every 30 minutes
demand by weekday/holiday of time of the day
(*1) weekday/holiday the week
of the month
Supply for Total of planned value of procured supply
forecasted
Planned value of supply not procured yet ─────
demand
(*1)
(*1)Forecasted demand in principle means the total demand in a control area, but

TSVIUs can request that PPSs submit their demand by servicing point when

incidents, such as scheduled outages influencing the system security in the control

area, require coordination of the entities concerned.

Moreover, other time spans for supply and demand planning can be requested if

necessary depending on the need to determine the ATCs of interconnections or the

supply and demand situation.

112
Table 4-3-2 Submission of generation schedule and outage schedule of
generation facilities

Short-term schedule
Submitted Annual Monthly schedule Weekly schedule Schedule for the
schedule schedule (next month, the (next week, the week next day
(first & second month after next) after next)
year)
Last day of First day of month Every Tuesday Every noon
Deadline October each
year
Generation Maximum/mini Maximum/minimum Maximum/minimum Energy (kWh)
schedule by mum power power (kW) by power (kW) and time every 30 minutes
power station (kW) by weekday/holiday of of the day (*4)
(*2) weekday/holida the week (*3)
y of the month
Outage Date of start/end of work, details of ― ―
schedule of work, and other necessary items
generation Scheduled outage
facilities ― ― outside the plan ―
(*5) Modification of sche
duled outage
(*2) A schedule is clearly stated along with net output and the name of a control area

where generation facilities exist.

(*3) TSVIUs can request PPSs to submit other time spans of schedules depending upon

operational situations in the control area.

(*4) TSVIUs obtain from a power exchange operator the value of the schedules that

accompany the transactions of the day-ahead market.

(*5) This corresponds to an outage schedule of generation facilities and a schedule that

requires control of generation output. The scale of generation facilities subject to

submission of a scheduled outage and the conditions of outage period are determined

by the rules of VIUs.

113
Table 4-3-3 Reported supply and demand balance in control area

Short-term schedule
Annual schedule Monthly
Submitted schedule Schedule for the next
(first & second schedule
day
year) (next month)
Deadline 25 March each 25 on a monthly 17:30 every day
year basis
Detail of Demand Monthly Maximum power Maximum power (gross
submission of control maximum power of control area power) and its time
area of control area (gross power) Minimum power (gross
(net power) power) and its time
Supply of Supply for Supply for Supply for demand of
control demand of control demand of control area (gross
area area (net power) control area power)
(gross power)

Table 4-3-4 Publication of forecast of supply and demand for the whole
country

Short-term schedule
Annual schedule Monthly
Publicized schedule Schedule for the next day
(first & second schedule
year) (next month)
Last day of After 17:30 each day
Deadline Last day of
month without delay
March each year
Detail of Demand Monthly Maximum Maximum power (gross
publication of the maximum power power (gross power) and its time
whole (net power) power) Minimum power (gross
country power) and its time
Supply of Supply for Supply for Supply for demand (gross
the whole demand (net demand (gross power)
country power) power)

114
Section 4. Coordination of scheduled outage
Scheduled outages are essential for the inspection and repair of
facilities depending on their intervals and conditions in order to
maintain the compliance of power facilities with the technical standards
established by laws and ordinances as well as security regulations of
each company and to secure system security by preventing failures in
the facilities.

This section determines the policy for the coordinated scheduled outage
of interconnections and transmission/generation facilities within the
control areas of TSVIUs and TSWEUs for its smooth and precise
implementation. It also sets rules for the scheduled outage of
interconnections and for scheduled outages influencing the ATCs of
interconnections among the transmission facilities within the control
areas (hereinafter referred to as “SOIAI”) of ESCJ in order to achieve
not only its smooth and secure implementation, but also the publication
of scheduled outage plans and the state of their implementation.

1. Scheduled outage to be coordinated


(1) Scheduled outage to be coordinated by TSVIUs and TSWEUs
TSVIUs and TSWEUs establish the rules of coordination for the
scheduled outage of power facilities such as the following operated
by all the interconnected LSEs and power producers as well as
end-use customers.

・Scheduled outage of:


– Generator (stoppage, restriction of generation of electricity,
restriction of water level of storage dam and restriction of
discharge from storage dam)
– Bus bar, main transformer, switch gear, current transformer,
voltage transformer, arrester, and phase modifying equipment
– Transmission line
– System protective relay and device protective relay, and neutral
grounding system
– Communication equipment that interrupts information
necessary for supervision, control, protection and others that
influence power system operation

115
– Others that influence power systems operation

(2) Scheduled outages to be coordinated by ESCJ among those in Item


(1)

・Scheduled outages of interconnection facilities


・SOIAI

2. Fundamental items for scheduled outage coordination


・ The items shown in Table 4-4-1 are considered when TSVIUs
coordinate the scope, timing, and period of outage of interconnections,
transmission facilities within control areas, and generation facilities
and make plans for their outage schedules, or when TSWEUs do so for
interconnections and transmission facilities within control areas and
make plans for their outage schedules.
・ TSVIUs establish rules for the coordinated scheduled outage of
interconnections, transmission facilities within control areas and
generation facilities, and TSWEUs for that of interconnections and
transmission facilities within control areas (hereinafter referred to as
“The rules of VIUs” and “The rules of WEUs”, respectively).

The following items are established in the rules of VIUs or WEUs:

・Facilities subject to coordinated scheduled outage by TSVIUs and


TSWEUs
・Items to be considered when coordinating scheduled outage
・Process of coordinating scheduled outage within entities and among
the concerned entities

116
Table 4-4-1 Items to be considered when coordinating scheduled
outages

Item Detail
Safety of facility and Maintenance and inspection period of power facility, working
people conditions, safety of personnel and the public
System security Power flow, maintenance of appropriate system frequency and
voltage, stability, degree of influence due to contingency of
facility and countermeasures, time required for emergency
restoration, season to avoid scheduled outage such as during
times of heavy load or high risk of facility fault due to lightning,
snow, and typhoon, avoidance of plural scheduled outages of
interconnection
Supply and demand Maintenance of supply and demand balance and appropriate
balance reserve margin
Avoidance of control Avoidance of control of long-term based resources
Degree of influence on Generation schedule, operating schedule, and scheduled outage
electric power industry planning of each electric power industry and end-use customers
Rationality Coordination of scheduled outage with interconnection,
transmission facility within control area, and generation
Others Necessity of scheduled outage, details of work such as period and
method, securing of workers

・TSVIUs and TSWEUs in principle give priority to securing the safety


of facilities and people, system security, and supply and demand
balance on condition that the stable power systems operation is
secured when they coordinate the scope, timing, and period of outage.
However the order of priority may be different from the above because
they take all the continuously-changing situations of demand/supply
and power systems, urgency of work, and so forth into account and
coordinate the order of priority.

・TSVIUs and TSWEUs are responsible not only for explaining the
coordinating process to those affected, but also responding to requests
for submission of data necessary for post-validation from ESCJ.
Moreover, ESCJ validates the scheduled outage based on the
submitted data.

3. Work sharing of scheduled outage coordination


・TSVIUs establish and make public the rules of VIUs and make plans

117
for and determine the scheduled outage plans through coordination
with the entities concerned on the basis of their applications for
scheduled outages. As to plans for the scheduled outages of
interconnections and SOIAI, they are determined based on the result
of the coordination by ESCJ. The concerned scheduled outages of the
transmission facilities with control areas and generation facilities are
modified if necessary to decide on the concerned scheduled outages.

・TSWEUs establish and make public the rules of WEUs concerning the
scheduled outages of interconnection and transmission facilities
within control areas and make plans for and determine the scheduled
outage plans through coordination with the entities concerned. As to
plans for the scheduled outages of interconnections and SOIAI, they
are determined based on the result of the coordination by ESCJ. The
concerned scheduled outages of the transmission facilities within
control areas and generation facilities are modified if necessary to
decide on the concerned scheduled outages.

・When the scheduled outage plans have to be modified or extra outages


have to be added inevitably, TSVIUs and TSWEUs coordinate their
details. This adjustment is made according to Table 4-4-1.

・ESCJ tries to reach a consensus on the plans for the scheduled outage
of interconnections and SOIAI and their modification submitted by
TSVIUs and TSWEUs through coordination in the meeting on
scheduled outages and so forth. ESCJ confirms and makes public the
scheduled outage plans determined by TSVIUs and TSWEUs based on
the coordination mentioned above.

4. Category of scheduled outage and its planning


The kinds of scheduled outages and their plans are shown in Table
4-4-2.

If it is necessary to categorize the scheduled outages and their plans


other than the details of Table 4-4-2 (e.g. first half of the fiscal year,
second half of the fiscal year) considering the scale of power systems
and institutional forms to ensure smooth coordination of scheduled

118
outages, TSVIUs and TSWEUs establish and make public those
additional categories in accordance with their own rules.

Table 4-4-2 Category of scheduled outage and its planning


Category Details
Scheduled Annual Scheduled outage plans for two years established to deal with the
outage schedule scheduled outages efficiently and smoothly through the
coordination of outage area, time, and period based on the
applications of the entities for scheduled outages
Scheduled outage plans for the concerned month established to
Monthly
deal with the scheduled outages efficiently and smoothly based on
schedule
the annual schedule
Modified or added Scheduled outage added or modified
scheduled outage

5. Coordination of scheduled outage planning


(1) Coordinating procedure at TSVIUs and TSWEUs
TSVIUs and TSWEUs establish and make public the coordinating
procedures in the rules of VIUs or WEUs as the period required for
the coordination of scheduled outages depends on the scale of
power systems and institutional forms. However, the scheduled
outages of interconnections and SOIAI need to match the
coordinating procedures of ESCJ.

(2) Coordinating procedures for scheduled outage at ESCJ


Procedures for the coordinated scheduled outages at ESCJ of
interconnections and SOIAI are as follows.

a. Annual scheduled outage planning


・ TSVIUs and TSWEUs submit the scheduled outage plans of
interconnections and SOIAI for the next two fiscal years
(hereinafter referred to as “Annual scheduled outage plan”) to
ESCJ each year by February 12 after making adjustments with
parties concerned according to the rules of TSVIUs and TSWEUs.

・ESCJ holds a meeting every February to coordinate the annual


scheduled outage after receiving the annual scheduled outage

119
plans from TSVIUs and TSWEUs.

・TSVIUs and TSWEUs determine coordinated annual scheduled


outage plans and, on receiving them, ESCJ makes them public
before March 1 each year.

b. Monthly scheduled outage planning


・ TSVIUs and TSWEUs submit the scheduled outage plans of
interconnections and SOIAI for the next month (hereinafter
referred to as “Monthly scheduled outage plan”) to ESCJ before
the 10th of each month (12th for February) after making
adjustments with parties concerned according to the rules of
TSVIUs and TSWEUs.

・ ESCJ coordinates the monthly scheduled outage plans after


receiving them from TSVIUs and TSWEUs.

・TSVIUs and TSWEUs determine coordinated monthly scheduled


outage plans, and, on receiving them, ESCJ makes them public
before the 20th of each month.

c. Explanation of details of scheduled outage planning


When coordinating the scheduled outages of interconnections and
SOIAI, ESCJ can request TSVIUs and TSWEUs to explain the
details of scheduled outage plans and their bases if necessary.

d. Submission of scheduled outage planning to ESCJ


The scheduled outage plans of interconnections and the plans of
SOIAI of VIUs and WEUs are submitted through the data
transmission systems linking ESCJ, VIUs, and WEUs. TSVIUs
and TSWEUs input the necessary data in these systems and
submit them to ESCJ before the date determined in this
paragraph. The details of the necessary data are given in
attached Paper 4-1. However, if they cannot input the necessary
data due to the outage/contingency of the above systems, they
submit them by filling in the attached Paper 4-2.

120
6. Coordination of modifications and additions of scheduled outage after
publication of the scheduled outage plan
・If changes in the supply and demand balance and power systems
and others that require modification of the scheduled outage
plans must be made inevitably or unexpected accidents of
facilities require additional scheduled outages, TSVIUs and
TSWEUs coordinate these modifications and the details of
additions each time according to the rules of VIUs or WEUs. If
TSVIUs and TSWEUs deem it necessary in order to protect
workers or facilities urgently, such coordination can be omitted.

・TSVIUs and TSWEUs submit to ESCJ the modifications and


additions of the scheduled outages of interconnections and SOIAI
together with their reasons each time. They report the details
and reasons for the urgent outages required for worker and
facility safety to ESCJ immediately after the fact.

・ After ESCJ receives the modifications and additions of the


scheduled outage plans from VIUs and WEUs, it convenes the
entities concerned if necessary, and coordinates and makes public
the modifications and additions of the scheduled outages of
interconnections and SOIAI each time.

7. Publication of decision and status of scheduled outage


・TSVIUs and TSWEUs decide on the execution of the scheduled
outages of interconnections and SOIAI coordinated by ESCJ
according to the monthly scheduled outage plans and the rules of
VIUs or WEUs. TSVIUs and TSWEUs also decide on the
execution of the concerned scheduled outages of the transmission
facilities within control areas and generation facilities according
to the rules of VIUs or WEUs.

・TSVIUs and TSWEUs confirm the starting and ending times of


work with the entities concerned when conducting the scheduled
outage. If the scheduled outages are cancelled or postponed due
to weather conditions and the like, they confirm the details and
reasons of the cancellations or postponements with the entities

121
concerned.

・TSVIUs and TSWEUs inform CCRC of the starting and ending


times of the scheduled outages of interconnections and SOIAI
coordinated by ESCJ, and ESCJ makes them public. If the
scheduled outages are cancelled or postponed due to weather
conditions and the like, they inform CCRC of the facts. ESCJ
makes public such facts as well as their reasons.

8. Public announcement of scheduled outage plan and status


The scheduled outage plans and their modifications, which are
coordinated by ESCJ and determined by TSVIUs and TSWEUs, as well
as the status of the scheduled outages notified by TSVIUs and TSWEUs,
are publicized through the system for publicizing of system information.
The details to be publicized are shown in attached Paper 4-3.

9. Procedure to deal with failure in coordination of scheduled outage


・If it appears likely that agreement will not be reached with the
entities concerned on the coordination of the plans of the
scheduled outages of interconnections and SOIAI due to problems
in coordinating generation schedules and so forth before the
deadline for submission, TSVIUs and TSWEUs can apply to
ESCJ for the coordination of scheduled outages. In response,
ESCJ tries to make adjustment and reach a final agreement on
the scheduled outages by holding a meeting for coordinated
scheduled outages, if necessary.

For the efficiency of such adjustment and reaching an agreement,


ESCJ can also hold a meeting of limited WG to work on the
unsettled scheduled outages before the coordinating meeting of
scheduled outages is held.

・TSVIUs, TSWEUs and the entities concerned respond to the


pre-coordination of the scheduled outage plans faithfully.
Moreover when they confirm those coordinating processes,
deliberate the countermeasures for those unsettlements, and so
regard no more room for those coordinations on the occasions of

122
unsettlement of the pre-coordination among them, TSVIUs may
resort to congestion management. Here, detailed applications
comply with Section 11 “Congestion management”.

123
Section 5 Policy for load dispatching instructions
This section establishes the fundamental policy for load dispatching
instructions from TSVIUs to the operators concerned and those who
interconnect the power systems in order to maintain power quality,
supply end-use customers with stable electricity, and secure safety.

TSWEUs give a load dispatching instruction to the operators concerned


within their jurisdictional areas while communicating and coordinating
with TSVIUs.

A load dispatching instruction includes the automatic control of


operation and switching of power facilities directly from computers and
automatic restoration devices not through human operation. This
section applies to the load dispatching instructions of TSVIUs and
TSWEUs.

1. Coverage
TSVIUs establish and make public the applicable area of load
dispatching instruction of TSVIUs according to the following:

・Operation and switching of the power facilities shown in Table


4-5-1 concerning supply and demand control and system operation
within the control areas of TSVIUs
・A load dispatching instruction to cancel work in order to maintain
system security because of abnormal weather conditions, system
contingencies, and so on
・Control/shedding of generation of power producers and load of
end-use customers to secure the stable system operation, such as to
maintain system frequency and resolve overloading of facilities
・ A load dispatching instruction to PPSs in the event of an
unnegligible influence on supply-demand control and system
operation within control areas such as frequent inferior
performances of load following of PPSs during peak demand in the
summer and so on.

However, if loss of human life, faults, or the spreading of faults are a


grave concern and urgent action is required, proper actions may be

124
taken independent of the load dispatching instructions.

The conditions, subjects, and details of the load dispatching instructions


comply with Section 1 “Policy for power system operation” and Section 2
“Securing of regulating capability necessary for maintaining power
quality”.

Table 4-5-1 Examples of operation and switching of power facilities by


load dispatching instruction and so on

Items Examples
Start/stop and active/reactive power control
(hereinafter active power control is referred to as
(a) Generator
“power control” and reactive power control as “voltage
control”)
(b) Main transformer (*1) Start/stop and voltage control
(c) Phase modifying facilities Same as above
(d) DC converter (*2) Start/stop and power/voltage control at DC output
(e) Neutral grounding device for
Start/stop and tap control
power systems
(f) Transmission line Start/stop
(g) Switching in/out Switching in/out concerning the above (a) – (f)
(h) Grounding Grounding (*3) and un-grounding
・Setting change of protective relay and system control
(i) Protective relay, system control device
device ・Lock/unlock of device
・Change of function and operational mode
Operation/switching considered especially necessary
(j) Others
for load dispatching
(*1) Transformers for generation, system interconnection, starting of auxiliary generation,

distribution, etc.

(*2) DC facilities, transformer for phase modifying, phase modifying facilities, AC filter, etc.

(*3) Excluding grounding by workers themselves during inspections of power facilities,

constructions, and so on

2. Scope and chain of load dispatching instruction


・TSVIUs establish and make public their own scopes and chains of load
dispatching instructions as shown in Table 4-5-2 in order to give their
instructions effectively and appropriately on the basis of Paragraph 1
“Coverage”.

125
Table 4-5-2 Typical scope of load dispatching instruction

Load dispatching center Scope of load dispatching instruction

・Power facilities required for central operation on the basis of


Central load dispatching
interconnection facility operation and supply/demand
center
control and system operation in overall control areas
Office in charge of district
load dispatching such as ・ Power facilities centrally operated by central load
system load dispatching dispatching center
and control center

・TSVIUs determine the scope and chain of load dispatching instructions


with the other entities after mutual confirmation through operation
agreements and so forth.

・The details of operation agreements need to be in line with the Rules.


Typical details are shown in Table 4-5-3. Items reflecting the
operational constraints of each power producer and end-use customer
can also be determined based on these operation agreements and so
forth.

126
Table 4-5-3 Typical contents of operation agreements

Entities
concluding
operation Item Detail
agreement
with VIUs
Load dispatching Chain of load dispatching instruction
PPS instruction
Schedule Notification/coordination of supply and demand schedule
(including use of interconnection)
Information system Information system and submission of record
Others Operational restraint and cooperation of load dispatching
control
Load dispatching Subject facility, scope, and chain of load dispatching
instruction instruction
Power
Operation/switching of concerned facilities and procedures in
producer Operation
case of contingency
and end-use
Information system Information system and submission of record
customer
Work Items concerning scheduled outage
Others Operational restraint and cooperation of load dispatching
control

3. Submission and reception of load dispatching instructions


3-1 Fundamental policy
A load dispatching instruction must be prompt, clear, and accurate in
order to supply end-use customers with stable electricity as well as
maintain security. The recipient must not reject, postpone, or modify it.
However, if compliance with the load dispatching instruction may affect
the safety of facilities or people, or cause problems with the operational
conditions of facilities, then cancellation or modification of the load
dispatching instruction can be requested, provided that the reason for
the request is given.

3-2 Fundamental items


(1) A load dispatching instruction is given using the terms of
instructions (*4) determined by TSVIUs, which TSVIUs make
public.

127
(2) TSVIUs prepare operational procedures in advance when
operating facilities based on load dispatching instructions under
normal conditions. When preparing these procedures, TSVIUs
discuss reasons, category, operation procedures (operation
switching procedures if necessary), switching time and safety
measures with the entities concerned and enter necessary items in
the operational procedures paper.

(3) Facilities operating by load dispatching instructions under normal


condition are subject to the procedures based on Item (2).

(4) These procedures for operating facilities can be omitted if the


facilities can be operated securely and precisely (output, voltage
adjustment) without using the procedures, or if there is not enough
time because of contingencies or other reasons.

(*4) The terms for instructions have been determined by each TSVIU
and used for load dispatching instructions, but they differ from
one control area to another. ESCJ will not try to make them
match as this could cause disruption and lead to disorder and
failures.

3-3 Submission and reception of load dispatching instructions


The submission and reception of load dispatching instructions must be
done promptly, clearly, and accurately as follows.
(1) A load dispatching instruction is given and received through a
chain of a load dispatching instruction.
(2) The persons exchange names when giving and receiving a load
dispatching instruction.
(3) The persons who give a load dispatching instruction clarify its
purpose and details.
(4) The persons who receive a load dispatching instruction
comprehend its purpose and details and repeat it.
(5) The persons who give or receive a load dispatching instruction
mutually record its purpose and details and clarify their
responsibilities.
(6) The persons who receive a load dispatching instruction promptly

128
complete their operations after receiving it and immediately report
the results to the persons who gave the load dispatching
instruction after their operations.
However, a report on the operations based on the load dispatching
instructions, such as power and voltage control of generation, can
be omitted.

129
Section 6 Policy for priority load dispatching instructions
TSVIUs can issue priority load dispatching instructions such that the
generation output of long-term based resources (nuclear power, hydro
power (excluding pumped storage hydro power), and geothermal power
stations) is not controlled during periods of light load, such as the New
Year holidays, holiday season between late April and early May,
night-time, holidays, and the period of abundant inflow. This section
sets the policy for priority load dispatching instructions.

1. Evasive action for control of long-term based resources generation


The order of action to avoid the control of generation output of long-term
based resources is as follows.

a. Control of generation output procured by VIUs and pumped storage


of pumped storage hydro generator also procured by VIUs
b. Use of power exchange transaction
c. Use of wide-area power interchange for mutual cooperation
d. Control of generation output of power producers supplying PPSs
(priority load dispatching instruction)

Note that the instructions on the control and shut-down of long-term


based resources are given after those of all the other generators.

2. Cautions for control and shut-down of generation output


In case of control of generation output of VIUs and PPSs, generators are
not shut down completely, but their outputs may be controlled to
minimum loads so as not to hinder their operations afterwards.
However, generators can be shut down if necessary when they can be
shut down without problems.

In case of control and shut-down of generators, individual ramping


rates of generator output, economy depending on fuel types, and
amounts of generator output that can be reduced are considered.

3. Requirement for wide-area power interchange for mutual cooperation


A wide-area power interchange for mutual cooperation can be exercised
after the deadline for submitting a daily schedule.

130
4. Submission of data to ESCJ necessary for evaluating wide-area power
interchange for mutual cooperation
TSVIUs, after executing wide-area power interchanges for mutual
cooperation, submit the data necessary for their post-evaluation to
ESCJ.

ESCJ can request TSVIUs to explain the details and the calculation
grounds of the submitted data if necessary for the concerned
post-evaluation.

(Example of submitted data)


・ Supply and demand balance (for example, forecasted supply and
demand balance at the time of executing wide-area power interchange
for mutual cooperation and actual supply and demand balance
incorporating wide-area power interchange for mutual cooperation)
・Details of measures for surplus supply, such as control of generation
output and pumped storage of pumped storage hydro station.
・Result of power exchange transaction, etc.

5. Conditions for giving priority load dispatching instructions


TSVIUs, upon securing regulating capability necessary for load
frequency control, operate generation facilities according to Paragraph
2 "Cautions for control and shut-down of generation output". However,
if the following situations are expected even after executing wide-area
power interchanges for mutual cooperation, TSVIUs in principle give
priority load dispatching instructions to PPSs through consultation
with them.

・Total amount of demand and pumping-up power is less than that of


generation.
・ Water stored at the pumped storage hydro dam (upper/lower)
overflows due to continuous pumping-up by surplus energy.

6. Recipient of priority load dispatching instructions


TSVIUs in principle give priority load dispatching instructions to PPSs
within their control areas. However, if there is not enough time for

131
appropriate measures against contingencies, such as when a huge
decrease in demand and a rapid inflow are more than TSVIUs expected,
TSVIUs can give priority load dispatching instructions directly to the
power producers within the concerned control areas.

When TSVIUs give the priority load dispatching instructions directly to


power producers, they must immediately inform the PPSs purchasing
the generation of those power producers.

If the PPS concerned is not in the concerned control areas, TSVIUs give
the priority load dispatching instructions to the power producers
supplying the PPSs with electricity.

7. Post-instructions explanation
TSVIUs are responsible for explaining the conditions of supply and
demand and the details of priority load dispatching instructions to the
receivers after giving the instructions.

132
Section 7 Definition of interconnections and so forth (hereinafter referred
to as “ISF”)
1. Definition of terminology
1-1 Interconnections and so forth
“Interconnections and so forth (hereinafter referred to as “ISF”)”
collectively refers to the following two transmission facilities:

・Interconnection
・Specified transmission line within control area (hereinafter
referred to as “STLCA”)

1-2 Interconnection
“Interconnection” means an AC/DC transmission line and AC/DC
converter, which interconnects the control areas of VIUs and whose
voltage is 250kV or above. (See attached Table 4-1.)

1-3 STLCA
STLCA means the transmission facilities of trunk transmission systems
inside the control areas of VIUs that have declined or canceled
cross-area wheeling services for more than 24 hours during the past
year. These facilities are specified by ESCJ.

If service decline or cancel occurred as a result of the following, the


above 24-hour rule does not apply.

a. Scheduled outage (annually, monthly scheduled outage, outage


modified or added);
b. Outage or degraded capacity of transmission facility due to natural
conditions, such as lightning, wind, snow, and so forth (including
preventive procedures);
c. Outage or degraded capacity of transmission facility due to
emergencies, such as public disasters, facility faults and so forth
(including preventive procedures).

A decline or cancel of cross-area wheeling service is defined as follows:

・Decline of cross-area wheeling service: When wheeling is judged not

133
possible after an application for an advance judgment on wheeling
availability or for wheeling contract is made within the range of
capacity permitted by an interconnection examination.
・Cancel of cross-area wheeling service: When wheeling is restricted
after the capacity of wheeling is confirmed.

The 24 hours that concern STLCA are obtained by adding the amount of
time (at 30-min intervals) for the past year when the wheeling service,
which is supplied after the weekly schedules from among the
applications for wheeling contracts, is declined or cancelled completely
(or partially).

The hours are not accumulated during the same unit period.

Table 4-7-1 shows voltage classes of STLCA.

Table 4-7-1 Voltage Classes of STLA

Hokkaido Tohoku Tokyo Chubu Hokuriku

275kV 500kV 500kV 500kV 500kV

187kV 275kV 275kV 275kV 275kV

Kansai Chugoku Shikoku Kyushu Okinawa

500kV 500kV 500kV 500kV


132kV
275kV 220kV 187kV 220kV

134
Section 8 Authorization of wheeling contract using ISF
This section determines how to authorize the existing contracts and the
new contracts of long-term based resources and resources constructed
simultaneously together with ISF (hereinafter referred to as “ECSF:
Existing contracts and so forth”), which are subject to Paragraph 5
“Classification and standard for authorization” on ISF priorities when
calculating available transfer capability (hereinafter referred to as
“ATC”) of ISF.

The use of ISF requires capacity registration and confirmation


according to Paragraph 1 of Section 10 “Fundamental approach to use of
ISF”, even if ECSF is authorized.

1. Applicant
The LSEs who request ECSF authorization must complete the
application procedures determined in this section for each contract.

2. Person to give authorization


ESCJ accepts or rejects applications according to Paragraph 5
“Classification and standard for authorization”. The committee to
authorize ECSF examines the application for ECSF authorization and
the board of directors decides on whether to accept it.

3. Effect of authorization of ECSF


Applicants can request ESCJ to give priorities of capacity registration
and confirmation of the schedules of power flows of ISF to ECSF
authorized by ESCJ, according to Paragraph 2 of Section 10 “Priority
order of use of ISF” through TSVIUs. In response, ESCJ will register
and confirm the requested capacity taking into account the priority of
the authorized ECSF, incorporating it in the scheduled power flows.

4. Subjects to be authorized
Contracts concerning cross-area wheeling are subject to ECSF
authorization.

5. Classification and standard for authorization


The classification and standard for authorization are as follows:

135
(1) Contracts concerning long-term based resources
These resources must come from nuclear power, hydro-power
(excluding pumped storage hydro-power) and geothermal power
stations.

The ECSF using future resources or modified ones using existing


resources can be authorized during the period applied for within
ATC.

(2) Contract concerning strategic and institutional resources


These resources must come from generation other than long-term
based resources and are developed according to the former Electric
Power Generation Development Promotion Law (situated
strategically or institutionally and in a wide-area coordinated
network operation system) and whose contract remains valid with
the same party.

(3) Contract concerning resources constructed simultaneously


together with ISF
These resources must come from generation other than long-term
based resources constructed simultaneously with the development
and increase of ISF, sharing its expenses appropriately, and whose
contract remains valid.

Generation resources planned for future development can also be


authorized.

(4) Other existing contracts


These contracts, other than those above, are authorized by ESCJ
according to Paragraph 14 “Authorization of ECSF in fiscal 2004”,
and remain valid.

The system operating interchange between the VIUs for the


purpose of effective use of transmission facilities and so forth is
also included.

136
When some of the authorized wheeling contracts shown in (1)-(4) above are
integrated, an integrated contract assumes the same effect which covers ESCJ’s
authorization in the original contract.
6. Maximum power to be authorized
In principle, the maximum power which can be determined by the
confirmable agreements between entities, such as the basic agreements,
agreements, memorandums, confirmations, contracts, and so forth
(hereinafter referred to as “Contracts and so forth”), is authorized. The
following power is also referred to based on the previous performance.
As for the above authorization, the rated output power of generation
serves as a standard and its station service power and so forth are also
considered. As for nuclear power generation, the flat operation of
thermal power is considered.

・Maximum power specified by Service Planning


・Maximum power determined likely based on previous performance
・Maximum power not described explicitly in Service Planning but is the
basis of calculations

If a power source is received by plural entities, the authorized


maximum power is proportional to the amount of electricity received by
each entity.

7. Period of authorization
The period stipulated by contracts and so forth is in principle
authorized. However, the period specified by Service Planning will also
be taken into account.

As for entities who have no obligations to draw up supply schedules and


notify Service Planning, a period longer than that of a contract of
cross-area wheeling service of electricity can also be authorized
considering the details of a contract of cross-area wheeling service of
electricity and wholesale/retail and so forth.

8. How to manage transactions using plural ISF


When transactions can be made using several ISF, the maximum power
of the transaction can be divided and authorized separately within ATC

137
of each ISF. However, the maximum power and period must be fixed for
every ISF concerned.

9. How to manage greater maximum power due to modification of


contracts and so forth
When the authorized maximum power increases due to a modification of
the contracts and so forth, the additional power requires new capacity
registration and confirmation according to Paragraph 8 of Section 10
“Outline of additional capacity registration”.

However, when modifying contracts concerning long-term based


resources and resources constructed simultaneously with ISF, the
additional power can be authorized as an ECSF within ATC. In this
case, an application is made for modification as specified in Paragraph
16 “Application procedures to authorize modification of ECSF”.

10. How to manage less maximum power due to modification of contracts


and so forth
When the authorized maximum power decreases due to a modification
of the contracts and so forth, an application for modification is made
according to Paragraph 16 “Application procedures to authorize
modification of ECSF”.

11. How to manage period extension due to modification of contracts and


so forth
When an authorized period is extended due to a modification of the
contracts and so forth, the additional period requires new capacity
registration and confirmation according to Paragraph 8 of Section 10
“Outline of additional capacity registration”.

However, when modifying contracts and so forth concerning long-term


based resources and resources constructed simultaneously with ISF, the
additional period can be authorized as ECSF within ATC. In this case,
an application for modification is made according to Paragraph 16
“Application procedures to authorize modification of ECSF”.

12. How to manage period reduction due to modification of contracts and

138
so forth
If an authorized period is shortened due to a modification of the
contracts and so forth, an application for modification is made according
to Paragraph 16 “Application procedures to authorize modification of
ECSF”.

13. How to manage greater/less maximum power and shorter period


without modification of contracts and so forth
If an authorized maximum power is increased or decreased, and an
authorized period is shortened without modification of the contracts and
so forth, they are handled as follows:

・The management of an increase of the power or extension of the period


is subject to that of long-term based resources and resources
constructed simultaneously with ISF stipulated in Paragraph 9 “How
to manage greater maximum power due to modification of contracts
and so forth”.

・The management of a decrease or reduction of the power or period is


subject to Paragraph 10 “How to manage less maximum power due to
modification of contracts and so forth” and Paragraph 12 “How to
manage period reduction due to modification of contracts and so
forth”.

If changes are to be made in those contracts that are authorized


according to Service Planning and so forth based on next year’s Service
Planning, they will also be managed according to this paragraph.

14. How to manage period expansion without modification of contracts


When an authorized period is extended without modification of contracts
and so forth, it is handled the same as long-term based resources and
resources constructed simultaneously together with ISF specified in
Paragraph 11 “How to manage period extension due to modification of
contracts and so forth”. However, the LSEs who request provisional
authorization can be authorized by completing the procedure as follows.
If changes are to be made in those contracts that are authorized
according to Service Planning and so forth based on next year’s Service

139
Planning, they will also be managed according to this paragraph.

14-1 Request for Provisional Authorization


An LSE can request provisional authorization on the expiration date of the
current authorization or one month prior to the deadline for Service Planning
notification. In such a case, the LSE shall request authorization together
with documents within one month from the day following approval of the
provisional expansion. Provisional authorization shall not be given if the
LSE does not request authorization after provisional expansion was approved.

14-2 Period of Grace


If an LSE did not apply for additional authorization or provisional authorization of
ECSF, the LSE can also request additional authorization within one month from
the date of the expiration.

14-3 Provisional Authorization and Judgment


If AUIs apply for additional or provisional authorization, authorization expiration
shall be dealt with as tentatively extended at the time the application is accepted
by the ECSF committee.
The committee must examine the request within three months after the request
and then promptly inform the applicant of its decision.

14_2. Notification of integration


An LSE which is going to integrate some of the wheeling contracts, shall notify
ESCJ of the integration.

15. Cancellation of Authorization


Cancellation of the authorized ECSF shall be done promptly following the
procedure prescribed in paragraph 19. “Procedures to cancel authorized
ECSF”, when cancellation is needed such as in the event of cancellation of the
contract

16. Authorization of ECSF in fiscal 2004


ECSF in Paragraph 5 “Classification and standard for authorization”
means those contracts whose authorization is notified by ESCJ before
January 31, 2005.

140
17. Application procedures to authorize modification of ECSF
When an applicant applies for an increase or decrease of the maximum
power or an extension or reduction of the period of the authorized ECSF,
he or she applies to ESCJ using the formats disclosed through the
website of ESCJ. Applications for modification are accepted at any time.

However, if modifications are made according to Service Planning and


so forth of the next fiscal year, the deadline is March 31 of every year.

18. Procedures to cancel authorized ECSF


When an applicant applies for cancellation of the authorized ECSF, the
applicant shall apply to ESCJ using the formats published on the
website of ESCJ. Applications for cancellation of the authorized ECSF
are accepted at any time.

19. Application for inquiry


In the process of examining the authorization of ECSF, ESCJ may, if
necessary, ask an applicant for details of his application. The applicant
can supplement or correct the data in response to the questions of
ESCJ.

20. Notification of authorization


After a decision on the authorization of ECSF is made, ESCJ completes
the procedures for the authorization or cancellation concerning
“Application for new ECSF” provided in Paragraph 15 “Application
procedures to authorize new ECSF after fiscal 2005”, “Application for
modification of ECSF” provided in Paragraph 16 “Application
procedures to authorize modification of ECSF”, and “Application for
cancellation of ECSF” provided in Paragraph 17 “Procedures to cancel
authorized ECSF” and then promptly informs the applicant of its
decision in writing.

21. Annual examination of authorized ECSF


The committee to authorize ECSF evaluates the actual usage of
interconnections of the authorized ECSF and so forth and examines the
appropriateness of its contents every year.

141
22-1. Submission of documentation for judgment
LSEs, whose ECSF has been authorized, submit monthly results of
interconnection usage for the past three years (the maximum wheeling
power) to the ECSF authorization committee by November 30 every
year.
When the authorized ECSF includes multi-location generators, LSEs submit the
results of usage for the past three years (the maximum wheeling power) to the
ECSF authorization committee.

22-2. How to examine


The ECSF authorization committee investigates the appropriateness of
the submitted documentation and can require the LSEs concerned to
explain it if necessary.

When the ECSF authorization committee judges the contents of ECSF


to be inappropriate, it can require the LSEs concerned to apply for their
modification according to the procedures provided in Paragraph 16
“Application procedures to authorize modification of ECSF”.

23. Information control and duty to protect privileged information


The persons in charge of authorizing ECSF provided in this section
must not only strictly administer related documents, but also not leak
or disclose the confidential information obtained in the course of
performing their duties.

142
Section 9. ATC of ISF
This section determines the fundamental policy for ATC of ISF in order
to provide non-discriminatory opportunities for the use of ISF. The
values of ATCs disclosed or calculated according to this section are used
as the indicators of several kinds of terms, such as long-term, annual,
monthly, weekly, and daily, and may vary depending upon changes in
the power system conditions as their actual operation draws near.

1. Facilities subject to calculation of ATC


ISF provided in Section 7 “Definition of ISF” is the facilities subject to
calculation of ATC. These facilities also include the ISF designed to
operate within the terms of calculation of ATC.

2. Calculation of ATC, operating capacity, margin, scheduled power flow,


and superposed power flow
The values of ATC, operating capacity, margin, scheduled power flow,
and superposed power flow are calculated according to Paragraph 5
“Formula of ATC calculation”, and Paragraph 6 “Calculation of ATC
formula constituents” by the TSVIUs that handle the power systems
connected to the facilities provided in Paragraph 1 “Facilities subject to
calculation of ATC”.

ESCJ confirms the results of ATCs calculated according to Paragraph 9


“Procedures for calculation of ATC and so forth (Initial ATC)” and
Paragraph 10 “Procedures for renewal of ATC and so forth (Renewal
ATC)” and then formalizes them.

3. Period for calculation


ESCJ formalizes the values of ATCs in every period provided in Section
2 of Chapter 8 “Disclosure of ATC and so forth of ISF”.

4. Condition to formalize ATC


ESCJ formalizes the values of ATCs in every time-span provided in
Section 2 of Chapter 8 “Disclosure of ATC and so forth of ISF”.

143
5. Formula of ATC calculation
ATCs of ISF are calculated as follows:

Each constituent element of ATC formulas needs to be formalized and


administered in each direction of power flow.

(Formula of “Excluding Kansai-Chugoku interconnection”)


ATC = Operating capacity – Margin – Scheduled power flow

(Formula of “Kansai-Chugoku interconnection”)


ATC = Operating capacity – Margin – Superposed power flow

However, the calculation of ATC for Shikoku Electric Power Company of


Kansai-Shikoku interconnection uses a different formula.

6. Calculation of ATC formula constituents


The policy for calculating ATC formula constituents in Paragraph 5
“Formula of ATC calculation” is determined as follows.

6-1. ATC (Initial ATC/Renewal ATC)


The formula in Paragraph 5 “Formula of ATC calculation” indicates the
values of ATC. Detailed procedures are shown in Paragraph 9
“Procedures for calculation of ATC and so forth (Initial ATC)” and
Paragraph 10 “Procedures for renewal of ATC and so forth (Renewal
ATC)”.

6-2. Operating capacity


(1) Calculation of operating capacity
Operating capacity of ISF is the minimum of thermal capacity,
stability, voltage stability, and system frequency maintenance
limits.

In principle, each limit is calculated for a – d as follows.

When calculating the operating capacity, the effects of power/load


control/shedding can also be considered depending upon the actual
conditions of power systems.

144
a. Thermal limit
Thermal limits mean the values of power flows based on the
currents determined by the continuous allowable temperatures of
the operating facilities in case of a single circuit or transformer
fault or by the rated currents of facilities in series (such as circuit
breakers, current transformers, and so forth).

b. Stability limit
Stability limits mean the values of power flows with which the
power system operation can be stable when assumed
contingencies are simulated. For example, the following failures
can be assumed.

・A single circuit fault of ISF


・ A single bus fault of substations or switching-stations
interconnecting ISF
・Loss of towerline composing looped transmission systems

c. Voltage stability limit


Voltage stability limits mean the values of power flows with
which upper and lower system voltage limits or voltage stability
limits can be maintained when assumed contingencies are
simulated. For example, the following failures can be assumed:

・A single circuit fault of ISF


・ A single bus fault of substations or switching-stations
interconnecting ISF
・Loss of towerline composing looped transmission systems

d. Frequency maintenance limit


Frequency maintenance limits mean the maximum values of
power flows with which each power system can maintain the
system frequency within a certain range of fluctuation and
prevent cascading power/load tripping in case of system
separations due to faults on the interconnections concerned. The
values are determined by the TSVIUs concerned.

145
As Hokuriku Electric Power Company interconnects with Kansai
Electric Power Company using AC lines (Echizen Reinan Line) and
with Chubu Electric Power Company using a BTB
(Minami-fukumitsu BTB station), and the flow to Minami-fukumitsu
BTB station may be blocked by a voltage dip due to a fault near
Echizen Reinan Line, their operating capacities should be calculated
by considering an additional amount of power flow from
Minami-fukumitsu BTB station to Echizen Reinan Line.

(2) Stability of 60Hz interconnected power system


The 60Hz interconnected power system, a long-distance/
longitudinal bulk power system, may experience a power swing
across control areas and become unstable on the conditions of a
heavy power flow from west to east in case of some contingencies.
This phenomenon must be prevented to maintain system security.

This phenomenon depends upon the phase angle between the


500kV bus voltage of Nishi-Kyushu substation (Kyushu Electric
Power Company) and that of Seiban substation (Kansai Electric
Power Company). Therefore, the TSVIUs interconnecting with the
60Hz interconnected power system make this phase angle an
indicator of the above phenomenon and ensure that it remains
below the upper limit.

(3) Conditions for formalizing ATC


In principle, a single set of conditions for formalizing ATC applies
throughout a year.

However, when conditions have already been pluralized or the


TSVIUs concerned realize that pluralizing conditions for
formalizing ATC would help eliminate or reduce congestion based
on the actual conditions of facilities concerned, appropriate sets of
conditions for formalizing ATC can be adopted according to the
actual conditions of facilities through discussions between ESCJ
and the TSVIUs/TSWEUs concerned.

146
In case of pluralizing conditions for formalizing ATC, the following
conditions can be considered:

・Season, week-day/holiday, and day-time/night-time

(4) How to formalize operating capacity in case of a single circuit


outage and so forth
When power systems have a single circuit outage due to scheduled
or forced outages of transmission facilities or for reasons of safety
and security, policies to determine the operating capacity are in
principle based on Items (1) to (3) of Paragraph 6-2 “Operating
capacity.”

However, according to the judgments of TSVIUs which operate the


facilities concerned, the policies to determine the operating
capacity for a single circuit outage are not based on these Items (1)
to (3), but can be determined through agreements with TSVIUs
and TSWEUs for the facilities concerned.

In this case, the TSVIUs who operate the facilities concerned


inform ESCJ of the calculated values of operating capacity and
their policies.

6-3. Margin
Margins mean the reserve capacities on each interconnection for system
security and the power transactions among TSVIUs through
interconnections against abnormal conditions and extra-low demand.
(1) How to reserve margin capacity
Capacity reserved as a margin is in principle “3% of system
capacity or the capacity by which power systems can maintain
system security in case of loss of the maximum generation unit”.

When securing 3% of system capacity, it is done in principle by


reserving 3% of the maximum system capacity every season.

In this case, the scales and structures of generation relative to the


system capacity of each VIU, a generation reserve margin, and

147
uncertain changeable factors which affect system security such as
actual use of interconnection, demand fluctuation, water flow
fluctuation, and generation outages other than scheduled outages,
are to be considered.

(2) How to allocate and set a margin for interconnection


When TSVIUs operate several interconnections, they can allocate
and set a calculated reserve capacity as a margin for the plural
interconnections.

In principle, margins are set in proportion to the system capacity of


other interconnected VIUs.

As frequency converters (hereinafter referred to as “FC”)


interconnect the 50Hz interconnected power system with the 60Hz
interconnected power system, a margin is reserved and set as
follows as a mutual backup for both systems.

・From 60Hz to 50Hz


Half the amount of 3% of the system capacity of Tokyo Electric
Power Company whose system capacity accounts for most of that
of the 50Hz interconnected power system and which receives a
great amount of capacity benefit from FC is reserved and set.

・From 50Hz to the 60Hz


Half the amount of 3% of the total system capacity of Chubu
Electric Power Company and Kansai Electric Power Company
whose system capacity accounts for most of that of the 60Hz
interconnected power system and which receives a great amount
of capacity benefit from FC is reserved and set.

(3) How to decrease the capacity reserved for margin


TSVIUs reduce the margins of interconnections according to the
following policy, calculate the new ATCs and so forth, and notify ESCJ by
submission before the deadlines for submission of the monthly and/or
day- after-next-day ATCs and so forth, defined in “9-2. Submission of
calculation results of ATCs and so forth”.

148
After confirmation and formalization of the submitted values, ESCJ
discloses the renewed ATCs and so forth before the deadlines shown in
Table 8-2-1.
Factors determining the operating capacity of interconnections, the
system capacity of AC interconnected systems, and system frequency
fluctuations during a generation loss due to a problem with the
maximum generation unit and transmission are to be taken into account.
a. At the monthly ATCs calculations
TSVIUs reduce the margins of interconnections as far as stable system
operation is allowed at the point of the monthly calculation and the
necessary generation reserve margin is secured.
Reduction at the monthly ATCs calculations is considered for the
following three ISFs :
・ Hokkaido – Honshu interconnected facility
(direction: Hokkaido ⇒ Tohoku )
・ Tohoku – Tokyo interconnection
(direction: Tohoku ⇒ Tokyo )
・ Tokyo – Chubu interconnected facility
(direction: Chubu ⇒ Tokyo, Tokyo ⇒ Chubu )
When CIPSO is inquired by AIUs and so forth of the idea on the
reduction and judges it necessary after the monthly reduction of margin,
CIPSO can request TSVIUs to explain the background for the reduction.
b. At the day-after-next day ATCs calculations
When TSVIUs expect the accuracy of their schedules to be improved to
some extent by reflecting fluctuations in demand and water flow, the
capacity reserved as a long-term margin can be reduced for the
day-ahead spot market provided stable system operation is maintained
and a necessary generation reserve margin is secured.

(4) How to use margins


TSVIUs can use the margins set on interconnections for bilateral
or forward transactions, when they assume it is impossible to
resolve a tight (or surplus) supply and demand situation in their
control areas.

Furthermore, TSVIUs can also use the margins set on


interconnections, when they resolve a tight (or surplus) supply and

149
demand situation in their control areas using nationwide power
interchanges.

a. Tight supply and demand situation in control area of TSVIU

・As for interconnections adjacent to the control areas concerned,


ATCs are used prior to margins before the closing time for
submitting the schedules for the next day; after the closing time,
margins set as a hot reserve are used prior to those set as a
spinning or emergency reserve.
・ As for interconnections not adjacent to the control areas
concerned, ATCs are used prior to margins.

b. Surplus supply and demand situation in control area of TSVIU

・ATCs are used prior to margins regardless of interconnections


adjacent to the control area concerned.

Moreover, when TSVIUs use the margins (or margins and ATCs)
set on interconnections, ESCJ judges it according to Paragraph 3-3
of Section 10 “Procedures for use of margins”. When there is not
enough time for making a judgment after the closing time for
submitting the schedules for the next day, an ex post facto
judgment is allowed.

6-4. Planned power flow


Planned power flows mean the sum of the schedules of power flows of
ISF registered or confirmed on every interconnection according to
Paragraph 8 of Section 10 “Outline of additional capacity registration”,
taking into account the directions of power flows.

The schedules of power flows of ISF in principle do not incorporate a


loss of cross-area wheeling service of electricity.

However, the conditions of operation, such as those in Table 4-9-1, are


taken into account for the sum, and TSVIUs establish and make public
its details, which ESCJ confirms.

150
When the sum requires congestion management, it is conducted
according to Section 11 “Congestion management”.

Table 4-9-1 Example of operational condition of ISF

Anankihoku Minami-fukumitsu Kitahon


FC
DC Trunk Line BTB Station Interconnection

Condition Sakuma FC
of ±30MW
±70MW ±30MW ±60MW
minimum Shinshinano FC
power flow ±40MW
20MW
When power flow of
Condition Sakuma FC changes
of step from 30MW to
40MW, its step is
10MW.
Power reverse control Higashishimizu FC Power reverse control
requires an electric Depending on the requires an electric
discharge of DC cables by operation status of discharge of DC cables
stopping the reversed the transmission by stopping the
poles for 1 hour in lines and hydro reversed poles for 1
consideration of their generators around hour in consideration
Others
lifetimes. Higashishimizu FC, of their lifetimes.
Power reverse control can there may be some Power reverse control
be performed up to four restrictions on the can be performed up to
times in succession, being operating and three times in
exempt from the above. changing power flow. succession, being
exempt from the above.

6-5. Superposed power flow (fence flow)


A superposed power flow means the maximum power flow among the
following, considering power flows into the remaining towerlines in the
event of a loss of the towerlines composing the looped power systems
including Kansai-Chugoku interconnection.

・Total power flow of Seiban Higashi-Okayama lines and Yamazaki


Chizu line
・ Total power flow of Seiban Higashi-Okayama line and Chugoku
Eastern trunk line
・Total power flow of Shin-Okayama trunk line and Yamazaki Chizu
line
・Total power flow between Shin-Okayama trunk line and Chugoku

151
Eastern trunk line

7. Inspection of ATC and so forth


If suspicious of the calculated values of ATCs, operating capacity,
margins, scheduled power flows, and superposed power flows, ESCJ can
inspect them. In response, TSVIUs are responsible for explaining them
when requested by ESCJ.

8. Recording and storage of data


TSVIUs record calculation results of ATCs, operating capacity, margins,
scheduled power flows, and superposed power flows and store the data
used for the calculation for three years in principle for ex post facto
inspections.

9. Procedures for calculation of ATC and so forth (Initial ATC)


9-1. Submission of data used for calculation of ATC
The entities which apply for wheeling through ISF submit the schedules
of power flows of ISF according to Section 10 “Rules for use of ISF”.

If the entities who apply for wheeling through ISF modify the submitted
the schedules of power flows of ISF, they immediately inform the
TSVIUs concerned along with an explanation, and promptly resubmit
the modified the schedules of power flows of ISF.

9-2. Submission of calculation results of ATC and so forth


TSVIUs submit to ESCJ before the following dates the calculated values
of ATCs, operating capacity, planned power flows, superposed power
flows of ISF, the schedules of power flows of ISF submitted by the
entities who apply for wheeling through ISF according to Paragraph 9-1
“Submission of data used for calculation of ATC”, and the values of
margins of interconnection:

・Long-term ATC: One week ahead of publication


・Annual ATC: One week ahead of publication
・Monthly ATC: One day ahead of publication
・Weekly ATC: Three hours ahead of publication
・ATC on the day after the next day: one hour ahead of publication

152
・ATC on the next day: one hour ahead of publication

If TSVIUs modify the values of ATCs, operating capacity, margins,


planned power flows, and superposed power flows after their
submissions, they inform ESCJ immediately along with an explanation,
and promptly resubmit the modified one.

9-3. Publication of ATC and so forth


ESCJ confirms/formalizes the values of ATCs, operating capacity,
margins, planned power flows and superposed power flows which are
calculated and submitted by TSVIUs based on Paragraph 9-2
“Submission of calculation results of ATC and so forth” in accordance
with the formulas provided in Paragraph 5 “Formula of ATC
calculation” and publicizes those values according to Section 2 of
Chapter 8 “Disclosure of ATC and so forth of ISF”.

10. Procedures for renewal of ATC and so forth (Renewal ATC)


10-1. Submission of renewal results of ATC and so forth
When TSVIUs need to renew the values of ATCs, operating capacity,
margins, planned power flows, and superposed power flows which are
publicized according to Section 2 of Chapter 8 “Disclosure of ATC and so
forth of ISF”, they complete their renewals and submit the renewed
values to ESCJ promptly.

10-2. Publication of ATC and so forth


ESCJ confirms and formalizes those renewed values submitted by
TSVIUs according to the formulas provided in Paragraph 5 “Formula of
ATC Calculation” and publicizes them according to Section 2 of Chapter
8 “Disclosure of ATC and so forth of ISF”.

153
Section 10. Rules for use of ISF
This section determines the fundamental policy and procedures
concerning the use of ISF to provide non-discriminatory opportunities
for its use.

1. Fundamental approach to use of ISF


1-1. Principle of capacity confirmation of ISF
The following principles apply to the capacity confirmation of ISF to
ensure equity and transparency.

・First come, first served


・Use it or lose it

1-2. Registration and confirmation of capacity


The LSEs who apply for use of ISF (hereinafter referred to as “AUI”)
submit application schedules of power flow of ISF (hereinafter referred
to as “ASPFISF”) to the TSVIUs on transactions concerned (hereinafter
referred to as “the VIUs concerned”). The VIUs concerned and CCRC
judge the availability of ASPFISF. CCRC incorporates the ASPFISF
judged available in the planned power flows and registers its capacity.
ASPFISF with its capacity registered in the planned power flows is
defined as the schedules of power flows of ISF (hereinafter referred to as
“SPFISF”).

The wheeling service contracts and so forth applied together with the
ASPFISF mentioned above are concluded between the applicants and
the VIUs concerned after completion of capacity registration. SPFISF
with its wheeling service contracts and so forth completed becomes the
capacity-confirmed SPFISF in weekly schedules made every 30 minutes,
which is the same as that for the schedules of real-time operation.

Actual power transactions are prerequisite for the capacity registration


of ISF. Moreover, the assessment of system interconnection of
generation facilities must be completed and demand secured (including
plans for demand acquisition that are unlikely to affect the efficient use
of ISF when there is one more year until actual power transactions)
when applying for the capacity registration of ISF.

154
1-3. Modifying SPFISF
Modification of SPFISF can be made in accordance with the wheeling
service contracts only when it does not affect the system stability. If
SPFISF needs to be modified, the LSEs who are permitted to use ISF
(hereinafter referred to as “UI: User of interconnection”) promptly
inform the VIUs concerned of its modification.

As for the ECSF which is authorized according to Paragraph 4 of


Section 8 “Subject to be authorized”, its SPFISF is to be submitted
within its authorized maximum power. However, when confirming
capacity greater than the authorized maximum power in accordance
with the wheeling service contracts of the ECSF, procedures for the
modification of SPFISF are carried out according to Paragraph 9
“Outline of modification of SPFISF”.

2. Priority order of use of ISF


2-1. Priority order of use of ISF
Among SPFISF for which applications have been made and judged
available by TSVIUs and CCRC, those with earlier CCRC registration
time are used prior to others that are registered later. Moreover, the
power flows of the authorized ECSF are incorporated in the planned
power flows prior to the others according to Paragraph 2 of Section 11
“Scope and order of congestion management”.
When some of the wheeling contracts are integrated, the new contract assumes
the registration times of each portion of the original contract.

2-2. Time stamp


ASPFISF is time-stamped after the VIUs concerned inform CCRC of
requested schedules without delay and when CCRC has accepted all of
them. However, if the TSVIU, one of the VIUs concerned with ASPFISF
demand (hereinafter referred to as “concerned VIU of demand”), instead
submits the schedules to the other VIUs, the time is stamped when
CCRC has accepted its notification from the concerned VIU of demand.

When SPFISF is modified, the additional capacity exceeding that of the


original SPFISF needs to be newly time-stamped, but the capacity

155
within that of the original SPFISF does not require modification of the
original time stamp. The priority orders of the additional capacity of
SPFISF accepted during the period provided in Item 3 of Paragraph 9-2
“Period for applying for modification of SPFISF” are regarded as the
same.

If the submitted data are insufficient or fail to satisfy the requirement


at the time of application, CCRC may cancel it.

The detailed procedures in accordance with the policy mentioned above


are shown in Paragraph 14 to 16, “Detailed procedures for additional
capacity registration”, “Detailed procedures for modification of SPFISF”,
and “Detailed procedures modification of SPFI”.

3. Judging wheeling availability and registering/confirming capacity


3-1. Judgment on wheeling availability
CCRC time-stamps the requested ASPISF and requests the VIUs
concerned to judge its wheeling availability. If the transmission paths
and periods of the ASPFISF overlap, the VIUs concerned are requested
to judge their wheeling availability one by one, suspending judgment for
others.
The VIUs concerned judge the wheeling availability of ASPFISF
depending upon whether the ATCs of ISF are positive or not. The
minimum ATCs are in principle used at each time span from long-term
schedules to monthly ones. Even if ATCs are positive, additional
applications for wheeling may be judged to be unavailable because of
restrictions on power settings of DC facilities and so forth and the
results from the analysis of wide-area stability and voltage stability in
Paragraph 6-2 of Section 9 “Operating capacity.”

TSVIUs specify and make public the detailed restrictions when the
conditional factors such as the restrictions on DC facilities restrict
wheeling availability. Examples of the conditional factors of ISF are
shown in Table 4-9-1 in Section 9 “ATC of ISF.”

The period of judgment on wheeling availability is from the first fiscal


year including the day of its application to the last day of the tenth

156
fiscal year. However, as there is no scheduled outage planned from the
third to the tenth fiscal year, the wheeling availability is judged
assuming that no scheduled outages are planned. Moreover, when
wheeling is not available because of a few days of scheduled outages, the
wheeling is judged to be available in the yearly and monthly schedules,
on condition that the wheeling availability decreases during the periods
of scheduled outages.

CCRC collects all the results of judgment on wheeling availability


notified by the VIUs concerned and eventually judges the wheeling
availability. CCRC deems ASPFISF to be available only when all the
VIUs concerned regard it as being available.

Even if ASPFISF is judged to be available according to this section, its


SPFISF may still need to be coordinated according to Paragraph 3 of
Section 11 “Procedures for congestion management” if the state of
power systems changes as the time of its actual transaction draws near.

The detailed procedures based on the policies mentioned above are


shown in Paragraph 13 to 16, “Detailed procedures for advance
judgment on wheeling availability”, “Detailed procedures for additional
capacity registration”, “Detailed procedures for modification of SPFISF”,
and “Detailed procedures modification for SPFI”.

3-2. Registration and confirmation of capacity


CCRC incorporates ASPFISF in the planned power flows of ISF and
registers its capacity when ASPFISF is judged to be available.

The contracts of the wheeling service and so forth applied for at the time
of submission of ASPFISF mentioned above are concluded between
AUIs and TSVIUs after completing the registration of its capacity. As
for SPFISF for which the registration of capacity is completed and the
contracts of wheeling service and so forth are concluded, its capacity is
to be confirmed in the weekly schedules made every 30 minutes, which
are the same as the schedules of the real-time operation. Moreover, as
for SPFISF for which the registration of capacity is completed and the
contracts of wheeling services and so forth are concluded after

157
establishment of weekly schedules, its capacity is to be confirmed when
the contracts of wheeling services are concluded.

When the ECSF which applied for authorization before 30 November,


2004 extends its SPFISF to and beyond the 11th year, it can register its
capacity on a priority basis by resubmitting its SPFIFS within the
authorized capacity.

Moreover, when the SPFISF of newly-concluded wheeling contracts


after 1 December 2004 extend to and beyond the 11th year, it is possible
to register the capacity at the same registered time as that of a year
before by resubmitting the SPFIF within the registered capacity in the
10th year in case of making long-term schedules according to Paragraph
10 “How to make SPFISF on long-term/yearly/ monthly/weekly basis”.

Judgments on wheeling availability and capacity registration are to be


conducted in every time span of planned power flows shown in Table
4-10-1.

Table 4-10-1 Time span of planned power flows

Long-term
Monthly Weekly
schedule Annual
schedule schedule
(from the schedule One-day ahead
(from three- (from
third (from the first schedule/real-time
Time span weeks ahead two-days
fiscal year fiscal year to operation
to ahead to
to the the second
two-months two-weeks
tenth fiscal year
ahead) ahead)
fiscal year
Maximum Maximum Maximum Every 30 Every 30 minutes
hourly hourly hourly minutes on
demand in demand in demand in a daily
Judgment each fiscal day-time and day-time and basis
on year night-time night-time
conditions classified by classified by
of wheeling week-day or week-day or
availability holiday on a holidays on a
monthly basis weekly basis

・“Holiday” means Saturday, Sunday, national holidays, and the days

158
designated by ESCJ and VIUs.
Note: ESCJ designates the days regarded as holidays from the
viewpoint of supply and demand every year after deliberation
with VIUs.
In addition to the days above, each TSVIU designates those days
depending upon its regional circumstances.
E.g. the New Year holidays (from 29 December to 3 January),
the holiday season between late April and early May (from 29
April to 5 May)
・“Week-day” means the days other than those above.

When an AUI requests CIPSO to investigate whether its wheeling


availability is judged appropriate and CIPSO considers that the
investigation is needed, CIPSO can demand that the TSVIUs concerned
submit the data for its judgment and documents describing the process
leading to its judgment. CIPSO investigates the appropriateness of the
judgment based on the submitted documents and so forth.

The detailed procedures according to the policy mentioned above are


shown in Paragraph 14 to 16, ”Detailed procedures for additional
capacity registration”, “Detailed procedures for modification of SPFISF”,
and “Detailed procedures modification for SPFI”.

3-3. Procedures for use of margins


When TSVIUs apply for wheeling using the margins of ISF in order to
resolve a tight supply and demand situation or surplus supply in their
own control areas, TSVIUs submit their supply and demand balance to
CCRC in advance, explain why those margins are needed, and request
permission for their use. CCRC evaluates the submitted supply and
demand balance on the basis of Paragraph 1 of Section 2 “Regulating
system frequency under normal conditions” and Paragraph 5 of Section
2 “Securing of hot reserve” and judges whether the VIUs can supply
electricity stably without using the margins of ISF. When CCRC judges
that the VIUs cannot, it permits them to use the margins of ISF and, if
necessary, also confirms with the VIUs the usable amount of margins
on the transaction lines. After receiving the request for confirmation,
the VIUs inform CCRC of the usable margins. However, if another tight

159
supply and demand balance occurs in the control areas on the
transaction lines, the VIUs may stop using those margins. CCRC and
the VIUs concerned judge the wheeling availability by considering use
of margins of ISF.

The TSVIU prohibited to use those margins can apply for a nationwide
power interchange if necessary. Applications for this nationwide power
interchange can be made according to the “Manual for nationwide
power interchanges” and its capacity registered according to Paragraph
8 “Outline of additional capacity registration”.

When an AUI requests CIPSO to judge whether VIUs use those


margins appropriately and if CIPSO deems it necessary, CIPSO can
demand that TSVIUs submit the results of supply and demand balance
in their own control areas and documents describing the process for
using those margins. CIPSO confirms its judgment based on the
submitted papers and so forth.

4. Assessment of annual SPFISF for the following fiscal year


Every year, CIPSO investigates the appropriateness of the annual
SPFISF for the following fiscal year.

4-1 Submitted papers


When an AUI submits the annual SPFISF for the following fiscal year,
the AUI also submits the following papers to CIPSO before the deadline
of submission for calculation of ATCs in Table 4-10-2.

(1) Actual power flows of ISF for the past three years (maximum
power every time span in Table 4-10-1)
(2) The annual SPFISF submitted for the past three years
(3) Data explaining the schedules of generation repair related to the
annual SPFISF for the following fiscal year

VIUs can submit Service Planning for the following fiscal year (an
excerpt from Service Planning related to this paragraph) if necessary.

4-2. Criteria for assessment

160
(1) The annual SPFISF complies with the contents of the wheeling
contracts.
(2) The annual SPFISF in the past is judged appropriate as there are
fake capacity registration when compared with Item (1) and (2) in
Paragraph 4-1 “Submitted papers.”
(3) The annual SPFISF is judged appropriate in comparison with Item
(1) in Paragraph 4-1 “Submitted papers”.
(4) The annual SPFISF is in accordance with Item (3) in Paragraph
4-1 “Submitted papers”.

4-3. How to assess


CCRC investigates the appropriateness of the annual SPFISF for the
following year based on the assessment criteria.

It can also demand that a UI makes an explanation, if necessary. CCRC


can also demand that a UI submits the process of SPFISF changes, the
hourly outputs of generation, contracts and so forth among others, if
necessary.

4-4. How to handle assessment results


When CIPSO judges that an annual SPFISF for the following year is
inappropriate because of unsuitable release of once-registered and
unused capacity, such as a fake registration, CIPSO can demand that
the UI resubmit it.

If ECSF is judged inappropriate under Item (2) of Paragraph 4-2


“Criteria for assessment” concerning SPFISF, CIPSO reports the result
of assessment to the committee authorizing ECSF.

5. Assessment of monthly SPFISF


CIPSO investigates the appropriateness of the monthly SPFISF every
month.
5-1 Submitted papers
When a UI submits the monthly SPFISF, he also submits the papers
shown below to CIPSO together with his monthly schedules before the
deadline of submission for calculation of ATCs as shown in Table 4-10-2.

161
(1) Documents explaining the repair schedule of the generator
(2) Corresponding annual SPFISF

5-2 Criteria for assessment


(1) The monthly SPFISF is judged appropriate as no fake registration
is found compared with Item (1) of Paragraph 5-1 “Submitted
papers”.
(2) Once-registered and unused capacity is released appropriately, when
SPFISF is divided from the annual schedules into monthly ones and
compared with Item (2) of Paragraph 5-1 “Submitted papers”.

5-3. How to assess


CCRC investigates the appropriateness of the monthly SPFISF every
month based on the assessment criteria.

CCRC can also demand that a UI makes an explanation, if necessary. It


can also demand that the UI submits the process of SPFISF changes,
hourly outputs of generation, and contracts and among others, if
necessary.

5-4 How to handle assessment results


When CIPSO judges that a monthly SPFISF is inappropriate because of
unsuitable release of once-registered and unused capacity, such as a
fake registration, CIPSO can demand that the UI resubmits it.

6. Selection of transaction routes


When an AUI applies to TSVIUs for wheeling service contracts and so
forth or an advance judgment on wheeling availability, he chooses a
desired transaction route and applies to the TSVIUs concerned.
However, if an AUI does not wish to choose a specified transaction route
at the time of application for advance wheeling availability, CCRC
chooses the route according to the following procedures.

・Selection priority on fewer VIUs concerned


・Selection priority on AC facilities with fewer restrictions over DC
facilities

162
When system security in the control areas of the VIUs is influenced, the
TSVIUs concerned, and an AUI if a specified transaction route is
desired or CCRC if no such preference is expressed, may discuss and
decide on transaction routes.

An AUI applies to the VIUs concerned for wheeling service contracts


and so forth based on the result of the selection above.

7. Outline of advance judgment on wheeling availability


An AUI who wishes a judgment on wheeling availability before applying
for wheeling contracts and so forth can check the wheeling availability
according to the procedures for its advance judgment. However, when
requesting an advance judgment on wheeling availability, an
assessment of system interconnection must have been completed
beforehand or an application made for it at the same time.

7-1 Procedures for advance judgment on wheeling availability


An AUI who wishes a judgment on wheeling availability before applying
for wheeling service contracts and so forth submits an ASPFISF to the
VIUs concerned at every time span of the planned power flows as shown
in Table 4-10-1 and applies for its advance judgment. The VIUs
concerned and CCRC judge the wheeling availability of the ASPFISF.
The detailed procedures are shown in Paragraph 13 “Detailed
procedures for advance judgment on wheeling availability”.

7-2 Application period for advance judgment on wheeling availability


An application for advance judgment on wheeling availability is to be
made by allowing sufficient time for additional capacity registration.

8. Outline of additional capacity registration


For an AUI who applies for wheeling service contracts and so forth, an
additional capacity is to be registered according to the procedures for
capacity registration of wheeling service contracts and so forth.
However, when making an application, an assessment of its system
interconnection must have been completed and its demand (including a
plan for acquiring demand whose actual transaction requires more than
a year and which may not impede the efficient use of interconnections)

163
must be secured.

8-1. Procedures for capacity registration of wheeling service contracts


and so forth
An AUI who wishes capacity registration submits an ASPFISF to the
VIUs concerned at every time span of the planned power flows as shown
in Table 4-10-1 and applies for its wheeling service contracts and so
forth. The VIUs concerned and CCRC judge its wheeling availability.
CCRC incorporates the ASPFISF judged available in the planned power
flows.

An AUI and TSVIUs conclude the wheeling service contracts and so


forth according to Paragraph 14 “Detailed procedures for additional
capacity registration”.

8-2 Application period of capacity registration concerning wheeling


service contracts and so forth
An application for a capacity registration concerning wheeling service
contracts and so forth is to be made by taking into account the period of
the judgment on wheeling availability and the consultation and
procedures necessary for concluding wheeling service contracts and so
forth. An additional capacity registration is to be completed before 12
p.m., 2 business days before its actual transaction.

An AUI applies within the application periods as follows when making


an application for an additional capacity registration.

Application period: 9:00–12:00 and 13:00–17:00 on business days


Note: “Business days” mean days other than Saturday, Sunday,
national holidays (holidays include the New Year holidays
(12/29–31,1/1–3), the anniversary of the founding of ESCJ (February
10) and VIUs (May 1) in addition to national holidays and substitute
days off (May 4)).

As for the transactions in the day-ahead market, whose capacity is


registered after 12 p.m., 2 business days before those actual
transactions, time schedules concerning capacity registration and other

164
matters need to be determined among the operators of the day-ahead
market, ESCJ, and the VIUs concerned.

9. Outline of modification of SPFISF


SPFISF is to be modified within the capacity of wheeling service
contracts and so forth according to the procedures for modification of
SPFISF. Congestion due to a decrease in offset power flows also allows
the concerned schedules to be modified. If the capacity of the
modification exceeds that of wheeling service contracts and so forth, an
additional capacity registration according to Paragraph 8 “Outline of
additional capacity registration” is required.

9-1. Procedure for modification of SPFISF


An AUI who wishes to modify SPFISF submits modified application
schedules to the VIUs concerned within the capacity of wheeling service
contracts and so forth at every time span shown in Table 4-10-1 and
applies for the modification. He needs to submit reasons for the
modification as well if the change is made after 12 p.m., 2 business days
before its actual transaction.

The VIUs concerned and CCRC judge the wheeling availability of the
modified ASPFISF. CCRC incorporates the modified ASPFISF judged
available in the planned power flows, using it as a new SPFISF whose
capacity has been registered. The detailed procedure is shown in
Paragraph 15 “Detailed procedures for modification of SPFISF”.

If decreased SPFISF of the offset power flows causes ATCs to be


negative, TSVIUs coordinate it according to Paragraph 3 of Section 11
“Procedures for congestion management” and inform an AUI of the
result of its coordination. The AUI who needs to modify his SPFISF
after receiving the notice, promptly submits to the VIUs concerned the
modified SPFISF reflecting the result of coordination.

The VIUs concerned and CCRC then judge its wheeling availability
again.

9-2. Period for applying for modification of SPFISF

165
The periods for applying for modification of SPFISF are as follows. An
AUI who applies for modification of SPFISF before 12 p.m. 2 business
days before its transaction applies within the periods shown in
Paragraph 8-2 “Application period of capacity registration concerning
wheeling service contracts and so forth”.

Applications for modifying SPFISF on the following day need to be


made within the following hours.

When the day before the actual transaction is a business day: 11 a.m.
– 12 p.m. the day before
When the day before the actual transaction is a holiday: 9 a.m. – 12
p.m. the day before

(1) Before 12 p.m. 2 business days before actual transaction


SPFISF can be modified on condition that electricity is actually
transacted.

(2) From 12 p.m. 2 business days before actual transaction to 11 a.m.


one business day before actual transaction
The modification of SPFISF is to be suspended so that CCRC can
calculate the ATCs for their notification to the day-ahead market
and secure them for transactions for the day-ahead market.

However, unavoidable modifications stipulated in Paragraph 17-1


“Unavoidable schedule modification” can be made as they need to
be performed before anything else to maintain system security.

(3) From 11 a.m. 1 business day before actual transaction to 12 p.m. 1


day before actual transaction
As this period is used for a final modification the day before the
actual transaction, economic procedures including additional
capacity registration by concluding a power trade and so forth are
suspended during this period. Details such as modification
availability are provided by Paragraph 17 “Availability of schedule
modification”.

166
The VIUs concerned only accept a modified ASPFISF from an AUI
and perform CCRC time-stamp registration as there is not
sufficient time for any other actions. Its wheeling availability is
judged after 12 p.m. the day before the actual transaction, with the
result notified to the AUI before 3 p.m. the day before the actual
transaction.

(4) From 12 p.m. to 5 p.m. the day before actual transaction


The modification of SPFISF is suspended during this period as
TSVIUs need to plan the supply and demand balance and system
operation for the following day.

However, unavoidable modifications provided by Paragraph 17-1


“Unavoidable schedule modification” can be made as they need to
be performed before anything else to maintain system security.

Note: The procedures after 5 p.m. the day before the actual
transaction are stipulated in Paragraph 12 “Outline of
management of SPFI”.

10. How to make SPFISF on long-term/yearly/monthly/weekly basis


SPFISF will be required in greater detail as the day of actual
transaction approaches. Therefore, a UI submits the SPFISF at every
time span shown in Table 4-10-1 to the VIUs concerned so that the VIUs
concerned can make long-term/annual/monthly/weekly SPFISFs. As a
more detailed SPFISF is required, the UI submits it by considering
repair schedules and past situations of supply and demand.

Annual/monthly/weekly SPFISFs are made in greater detail within


their maximum capacity in each time span according to their production
procedures.

If the value of SPFISF is exceeded in usual time spans when a UI


submits an SPFISF in a new time span, it is necessary first to modify
the value in usual time spans in accordance with Paragraph 9 “Outline
of modification of SPFISF” before submitting the SPFISF for the new
time span.

167
10-1 How to submit SPFISF
A UI submits an SPFISF at every time-span shown in Table 4-10-1
before the deadlines for the coordination in Table 4-10-2. However, the
VIUs with the demand can submit the SPFISF on his behalf to the VIUs
concerned.

If it is necessary to modify the SPFISF as supply and demand and


system operation plans are made, a UI discusses and coordinates with
the VIUs concerned.

A UI submits the SPFISF reflecting the result of coordination before the


deadlines for calculating the ATCs shown in Table 4-10-2.

Further, the UI, who is required to modify his SPFISF, submits it


promptly.

10-2. How to make SPFISF


The VIUs concerned make SPFISF for every time-span before the
deadlines in Table 4-10-2 and inform a UI and CCRC of the established
SPFISF.

If TSVIUs need to manage the congestion of SPFISF submitted by a UI,


they coordinate SPFISF according to Paragraph 3 of Section 11
“Procedures for congestion management” and inform the UI of its result.

CCRC calculates the planned power flows and new ATCs of ISF at every
time-span shown in Table 4-10-1 according to Paragraph 9 of Section 9
“Procedures for calculation of ATC and so forth (Initial ATC)”.

168
Table 4-10-2 Deadline for submitting and making SPFISF
Monthly Weekly
Long-term Annual
schedule schedule
schedule schedule
Period (one month (one week ahead
(the 3rd to 10th (the 1st to 2nd
ahead to two to two weeks
fiscal years) fiscal years)
months ahead) ahead
Deadline for Jan. 15 every Dec. 20 every
5th every month
Coordination year year
Deadline for
Mar. 10 every Mar. 1 every 15th every
Calculation of every Tuesday
year year month
ATC
Deadline for
Mar. 31 every Mar. 15 every 20th every
Making every Thursday
year year month
Schedule

11. How to make SPFISF the following day


11-1. Submission of SPFISF
A UI submits SPFISF the following day to the VIUs concerned before 12
p.m. the day before the actual transaction. However, the VIUs with the
demand can submit the SPFISF on the UI’s behalf to the VIUs
concerned.

If a UI applies for modification of SPFISF between 11 a.m. on the


business day before the actual transaction and 12 p.m. the day before
the actual transaction under Item (3) of Paragraph 9-2 “Period for
applying for modification of SPFISF”, the modified ASPFISF submitted
is regarded as the SPFISF for the following day, on condition that the
modified ASPFISF is judged available.

11-2 How to make SPFISF


The VIUs concerned inform a UI of the result of judgment on wheeling
availability of the modified ASPFISF before 3 p.m. the day before the
actual transaction.

If congestion management is necessary, the VIUs coordinate SPFISF


according to Paragraph 3 of Section 11 “Procedures for congestion
management” and inform the UI of the result.

The UI who needs to modify his SPFISF after receiving the notification,
promptly submits his SPFISF reflecting the result of coordination to the
VIUs concerned.

169
The VIUs concerned judge the wheeling availability of SPFISF again,
make the final day-ahead SPFISF before 5 p.m. and inform the UI and
CCRC of the result. CCRC calculates the planned power flows and new
ATCs of ISF of the day-ahead schedule according to Paragraph 9 of
Section 9 “Procedures for calculation of ATC and so forth (Initial ATC)”.

The VIUs concerned regard the values of day-ahead SPFISF as the


initial values of scheduled power flow of ISF (hereinafter referred to as
“SPFI”). The VIUs concerned converts the values of SPFISF to those
that reflect the transfer loss and informs them, which are regarded as
the standard scheduled values of power flows of interconnections, to the
VIUs concerned. After this notification, these standard values may be
adjusted among the VIUs concerned depending upon the operational
restrictions of interconnections.

12. Outline of management of SPFI


In the event of unexpected developments after 5 p.m. the day before the
actual transaction of SPFI when SPFI is finalized, SPFI can be modified
within the capacities of its contracts and so forth in accordance with the
modification procedure. Whether the requested modification is accepted
or not depends upon Paragraph 17 “Availability of schedule
modification”.

However, the modification of SPFI necessary for supply and demand


control and frequency regulation may not depend on the following.

12-1. Procedure for modification of SPFI


An LSE who wishes to modify SPFI (hereinafter referred to as “LSE
WM”) applies to the VIUs concerned for the modification, submitting
requested modification values and their reasons before the deadline
established and publicized by TSVIUs.

The VIUs concerned and CCRC judge whether SPFI can be modified or
not and inform LSEWM of the renewed SPFI. CCRC renews the
planned power flows of ISF corresponding to the renewed SPFI. The
detailed procedures are shown in Paragraph 16 “Detailed procedures for

170
modification of SPFI”.

Unavoidable modifications stipulated in Paragraph 17-1 “Unavoidable


schedule modification” or the modifications necessary for system
security in Paragraph 17-2 “Schedule modification necessary for power
system operation” allow TSVIUs to modify SPFI in order to maintain
system security regardless of the deadlines established and publicized.
The starting time of modification of SPFI is deliberated and coordinated
among the TSVIUs.

13. Detailed procedures for advance judgment on wheeling availability


13-1 Application for advance judgment on wheeling availability
If necessary, an AUI can apply for advance judgment on wheeling
availability to the VIUs concerned.

This application requires the AUI to submit his ASPFISF at the time
spans shown in Table 4-10-1. However, the VIUs with the demand could
submit the application on behalf of the AUI to the VIUs concerned.

13-2 Application
TSVIUs accept an application for advance judgment on wheeling
availability during the application periods stipulated in Paragraph 8-2
“Application period of capacity registration concerning wheeling service
contracts and so forth” according to the procedures established and
publicized.

13-3 Request for judgment on wheeling availability


TSVIUs request CCRC to judge the wheeling availability of ASPFISF.
CCRC refers to the VIUs concerned for the judgment on the requested
wheeling availability.

13-4 Judgment on wheeling availability and notification


(1) Judgment on wheeling availability
The VIUs concerned judge the wheeling availability in the order in
which applications were made and promptly inform CCRC of the
result of and reason for the judgment. If the capacity of ASPFISF is
deemed partially unavailable by the VIUs concerned during a

171
certain period, the VIUs inform CCRC of the unavailable periods
and the available capacity of wheeling. After the capacity is judged
unavailable, they also inform CCRC of the available capacity of
wheeling throughout the period of wheeling if so requested by AUI.

(2) Summary of judgment on wheeling availability


CCRC summarizes all the judgments on wheeling availability
submitted by the VIUs concerned to make a final judgment on
availability.

(3) Notification of judgment


CCRC informs the VIUs concerned of the final judgment and its
reason and also the unavailable periods and the available capacity
of wheeling or the available capacity of wheeling throughout the
period of wheeling if any. The VIUs concerned inform the AUIs of
the matters notified by CCRC.

13-5 Others
A power exchange operator and ESCJ deliberate on and determine the
necessary matters, such as the procedures for the ASPFISF on the basis
of supply and demand matching through a transaction on a power
exchange concerning Paragraph 13-1 “Application for advance judgment
on wheeling availability” and Paragraph 13-3 “Request for judgment on
wheeling availability”.

14. Detailed procedures for additional capacity registration


Detailed procedures for an additional capacity registration are as
follows except for a nationwide power interchange in which TSVIUs
supply and receive electricity to and from other TSVIUs through ISF.

14-1. Application for wheeling contracts and so forth


An AUI applies to the VIUs concerned for wheeling contracts and so
forth by submitting the ASPFISF at every time span shown in Table
4-10-1. However, the VIUs with the demand can submit the application
on behalf of the AUI to the VIUs concerned.

14-2. Reception of application

172
TSVIUs accept ASPFISF within the periods stipulated in Paragraph 8-2
“Application period of capacity registration concerning wheeling service
contracts and so forth” according to the procedures established and
publicized.

14-3. Request for judgment on wheeling availability


TSVIUs request CCRC to judge the wheeling availability of ASPFISF.

14-4. Request for time stamp and judgment on wheeling availability


CCRC time-stamps the requested ASPFISF and requests the VIUs
concerned to judge its wheeling availability.

If the submitted data necessary for the applications for wheeling service
contracts and so forth are deemed inadequate, CCRC cancels them and
informs the AUIs of the effect through the TSVIUs.

14-5. Judgment on wheeling availability and notification


(1) Judgment on wheeling availability
When requested by CCRC, the VIUs concerned judge the wheeling
availability and promptly inform CCRC of the result and its
reason.

They also inform CCRC of the unavailable periods and the


available capacity of wheeling.

(2) Summary of judgment on wheeling availability


CCRC summarizes all the judgments on wheeling availability
submitted by the VIUs concerned and makes the final judgment.

(3) Notification of judgment


CCRC informs the VIUs concerned of the final judgment and its
reason and also the unavailable periods and the available capacity
of wheeling, and the VIUs concerned check the informed judgment.
The VIUs concerned then inform the AUIs of the matters notified
by CCRC.

14-6. Establishment of SPFISF

173
CCRC establishes SPFISF by incorporating ASPFISF judged available
in SPFISF and registering its capacity.

14-7 Renewal of ATC


CCRC renews ATCs according to Paragraph 10 of Section 9 “Procedure
for renewal of ATC and so forth (Renewal ATC)”.

14-8. Conclusion of wheeling contracts and so forth


An AUI concludes the wheeling contracts and so forth after his wheeling
is judged available.

15. Detailed procedures for modification of SPFISF


15-1. Application for modification of SPFISF
An AUI who wishes to modify his SPFISF applies to the VIUs concerned
for its modification by submitting a new plan for SPFISF within the
capacity of his contracts and so forth at every time span shown in Table
4-10-1. However, the VIUs with the demand can submit the plan on
behalf of the AUI to the VIUs concerned.

15-2 Application
TSVIUs accept the modified SPFISF within the periods stipulated in
Paragraph 9-2 “Period for applying for modification of SPFISF”
according to the procedures established and publicized.

15-3. Request for judgment on wheeling availability


TSVIUs request CCRC to judge the wheeling availability of
modification of SPFISF.

15-4 Request for time stamp and judgment on wheeling availability


In case of modification of SPFISF, CCRC registers new time stamps for
the additional capacity exceeding that of the original SPFISF, but not if
within the capacity of the original SPFISF.

CCRC requests the VIUs concerned to judge its wheeling availability.

If the submitted data necessary for the applications for wheeling service
contracts and so forth are deemed inadequate, CCRC cancels them and

174
informs the AUIs of the effect through the TSVIUs.

15-5 Judgment on wheeling availability and notification


(1) Judgment on wheeling availability
When requested by CCRC, the VIUs concerned judge the wheeling
availability and promptly inform CCRC of the result and its reason.
They also inform CCRC of the unavailable periods and the
available capacity of wheeling.

(2) Summary of judgment on wheeling availability


CCRC summarizes all the judgments on wheeling availability
submitted by the VIUs concerned and makes the final judgment.

(3) Notification of judgment


CCRC informs the VIUs concerned of the final judgment and its
reason and also the unavailable periods and the available capacity
of wheeling, and the VIUs concerned check the informed judgment.

The VIUs concerned then inform the UIs of the matters notified by
CCRC.

15-6 Establishment of SPFISF


CCRC establishes SPFISF by incorporating the newly-applied SPFISF
judged available in SPFISF and registering its capacity.

15-7 Measure for congestion


When decreased offset SPFISF causes ATCs to be negative, TSVIUs
coordinate it according to Paragraph 3 of Section 11 “Procedures for
congestion management” and inform the UIs of the result.

15-8 Renewal of ATC


CCRC renews ATCs according to Paragraph 10 of Section 9 “Procedures
for renewal of ATC and so forth (Renewal ATC)”.

15-9 Coordination of SPFISF


A UI whose SPFISF is coordinated by TSVIUs according to the
congestion management in Paragraph 15-7 “Measure for congestion”

175
submits the SPFISF that reflects the coordinating result to the VIUs
concerned before the deadline in Paragraph 15-2 “Application”.

16. Detailed procedures for modification of SPFI


16-1. Application for modification of SPFI
An AUI who wishes to modify his SPFI applies to the VIUs concerned
for its modification. However, the VIUs with the demand can submit the
application on behalf of the AUI to the VIUs concerned.

16-2 Application
TSVIUs accept a modification application of SPFI between 5 p.m. the
day before its actual transaction and the time established by individual
firms. However, TSVIUs may not accept the application in case of a
severe contingency.

16-3 Request for judgment on wheeling availability of modification of


SPFI
TSVIUs request CCRC to judge the wheeling availability of
modification of SPFI.

16-4 Request for time stamp and judgment on modification of SPFI


CCRC time-stamps the additional capacity exceeding that of the
original SPFI, and requests the VIUs concerned to judge the wheeling
availability of SPFI modification.

However, if the submitted data necessary for an application for


wheeling availability of modification of SPFI are deemed inadequate,
CCRC cancels the application and informs the UIs of the cancellation
through the TSVIUs.

16-5 Judgment on wheeling availability of SPFI modification and


notification
(1) Judgment on wheeling availability of SPFI modification
When requested by CCRC, the VIUs concerned judge the wheeling
availability of SPFI modification and promptly inform CCRC of the
result and its reason. They also inform CCRC of the available
maximum capacity of wheeling.

176
(2) Summary of judgment on wheeling availability of SPFI
modification
CCRC summarizes all the judgments on wheeling availability
submitted by the VIUs concerned and makes the final judgment. If
part of SPFI modification is available, CCRC regards the available
maximum value of modification of the original SPFI as a new
SPFI.

(3) Notification of judgment


CCRC informs the VIUs concerned of the final judgment and its
reason and also the renewed SPFI, and the VIUs concerned check
the informed judgment.

Moreover, the VIUs concerned inform the AUI of the matters


notified by CCRC.

16-6 Establishment of SPFI


CCRC replaces SPFI before modification with the new one and renews
the planned power flows of ISF. The VIUs concerned converts the
values of SPFISF to those that reflect the transfer loss which are
regarded as the standard scheduled values of power flows of
interconnections. After being informed, the VIUs concerned may
coordinate those standard values with each other depending upon the
operational restrictions of interconnections.

16-7 Measure for congestion


If decreased offset SPFI or a fall in operating capacity due to a problem
with interconnections causes ATCs to be negative, TSVIUs coordinate it
according to Paragraph 3 of Section 11 “Procedures for congestion
management” and inform the VIUs concerned and the UIs of the result.
TSVIUs inform CCRC of the new congestion-free SPFI according to
Paragraph 3 of Section 11 “Procedures for congestion management”.

16-8. Renewal of ATC


CCRC renews ATCs according to Paragraph 10 of Section 9 “Procedures
for renewal of ATC and so forth (Renewal ATC)”.

177
16-9 Readjustment of SPFI
An applicant for modification of SPFI whose application has not been
entirely accepted because of the judgment on wheeling availability of
SPFI modification under Paragraph 16-5 “Judgment on wheeling
availability of SPFI modification and notification”, or a UI who has been
informed of modification of SPFI following congestion management
under Paragraph 16-7 “Measure for congestion” can produce new
application values of SPFI modification and apply for them within the
value of SPFI that has been notified in accordance with Paragraph 16-5
“Judgment on wheeling availability of SPFI modification and
notification” and Paragraph 16-7 “Measure for congestion”, provided
that such applications can be made before the time specified in
Paragraph 16-2 “Application”.

17. Availability of schedule modification


17-1. Unavoidable schedule modification
Unavoidable schedule modifications are as shown below, which CCRC
judges whenever modification is made.

・ Schedule modifications according to the TSVIUs’ load dispatching


instructions stipulated in Paragraph 1 of Section 5 “Coverage”
・ Schedule modifications according to the congestion management
stipulated in Paragraph 2 of Section 11 “Scope and order of congestion
management”
・ Schedule modification according to a priority load dispatching
instruction and its evading procedure
・Schedule modification due to incidents for which entities are not
responsible, such as natural hazards (lightning, wind, snow, contact
with wild animals, etc.) and public disasters

When CIPSO is asked by UIs and so forth to evaluate unavoidable


schedule modifications and judges them necessary, CIPSO can demand
that TSVIUs present documents explaining the incidents. CIPSO
evaluates the schedule modification based on the presented documents.

17-2. Schedule modification necessary for power system operation

178
Schedule modifications necessary for power system operation are as
follows and the facilities, their repairs and so forth subject to the
necessary schedule modification are to be notified to CCRC in advance.

・Power transmission from a hydro power station necessary for the


schedule modification due to water flow situation
・Supply-and-demand control and frequency control in a control area
・ Scheduling operation and other related actions at the time of
maintenance and construction

When CIPSO is asked by AUIs and so forth to evaluate the schedule


modification necessary for power system operation and judges it
necessary, it can demand that TSVIUs and UIs present documents
explaining the concerned facilities, their repairs and other relevant
matters. CIPSO evaluates the schedule modification on the basis of the
presented documents.

17-3. Availability of schedule modification for each period


The schedule modification is available by period as follows.
(1) Before 12 p.m. 2 business days before actual transaction

・Paragraph 17-1 “Unavoidable schedule modification”


・ Paragraph 17-2 “Schedule modification necessary for power
system operation”
・Schedule modification due to generator accident
・Schedule modification for supply-and-demand control and load
following
・Schedule modification due to economic activity

(2) From 12 p.m. 2 business days before actual transaction to 11 a.m.


the day before actual transaction

・Paragraph 17-1 “Unavoidable schedule modification”

(3) From 11 a.m. the business day before actual transaction to 12 p.m.
the day before actual transaction

179
・Paragraph 17-1 “Unavoidable schedule modification”
・ Paragraph 17-2 “Schedule modification necessary for power
system operation”
・Schedule modification due to generator accident
・Schedule modification for supply-and-demand control and load
following

(4) From 12 p.m. the day before actual transaction to 5 p.m. the day
before actual transaction

・Paragraph 17-1 “Unavoidable schedule modification”

(5) Period of modification of SPFI after 5 p.m. the day before actual
transaction

・Paragraph 17-1 “Unavoidable schedule modification”


・ Paragraph 17-2 “Schedule modification necessary for power
system operation”
・Schedule modification due to generator accident
・Schedule modification for supply-and-demand control and load
following

However, schedule modifications for supply-and-demand control


and load following that reduces the offset power flows and thus
causes congestions are prohibited.

18. Application of modification charges


ESCJ sets charges for modifications that cause a reduction in SPFISF
that satisfies a certain requirement as a measure to prevent fake in
capacity registration from impeding the use of ISF for other entities.

The unit price of modification charges should be set so as to not only


properly release unused capacity, but also not force the entities to pay
too much. For the start of operations, the board of directors of ESCJ
determine the unit price at the minimum level.

ESCJ examines whether the unused capacity is properly released based

180
on the actual results.

18-1. Scope of modification charges


(1) Period for modification charges
The modification charges of SPFISF apply from 5 p.m. 7 days
before the actual transaction to 12 p.m. the day before the actual
transaction, and charges of SPFI apply from 5 p.m. the day before
the actual transaction to the actual transaction.

(2) Modification of SPFISF subject to modification charges


Modification charges apply to a case in which there is a decrease in
the modification of SPFISF that is the same direction as the power
flow during the period (every 30 minutes) when ATC is less than
5% of operating capacity of ISF. The ISF subject to modification
charges is set at 5 p.m. 7 days before the actual transaction for
SPFISF and at 5 p.m. the day before the actual transaction for
SPFI.

However, schedule modifications due to the following reasons are


not subject to modification charges:

・Paragraph 17-1 “Unavoidable schedule modification”


・ Paragraph 17-2 “Schedule modification necessary for power
system operation”
・Schedule modification due to generator accident

(3) Energy subject to modification charges


・Energy subject to the modification charges of SPFISF
Of the SPFISF corresponding to Item (2), if there is a drop of over
10% at 12 p.m. the day before the actual transaction from the level
at 5 p.m. 7 days before the actual transaction, the modification of
energy exceeding 10% is subject to the modification charges.

・Energy subject to the modification charges of SPFI


When the actual SPFI corresponding to Item (2) above decreases
10% more than that at 5 p.m. the day before the actual transaction,
the modification of energy exceeding 10% is subject to the

181
modification charges.

18-2. Procedure for calculating energy subject to modification charges


After actual transactions, the modification charges are calculated as
follows. Exceptions of charges are judged by CCRC.

(1) Calculation of energy subject to modification charges


TSVIUs calculate the energy subject to modification charges for the
modification of the SPFISF corresponding to Item (2) of Paragraph
18-1 “Scope of modification charges”. TSVIUs submit the
exceptions to charges and documents explaining them to CCRC.

(2) Judgment on scope of modification charges


CCRC judges whether the modification is subject to the charges
and informs the TSVIUs of its judgment.

(3) Notification of energy subject to modification charges


TSVIUs inform UIs as well as CCRC of the energy subject to
modification charges.

18-3. Post-evaluation of scope of modification charges


When CIPSO is requested by AUIs and so forth to evaluate the
modification charges and determines it necessary, it can demand that
TSVIUs or UIs submit necessary documents. CIPSO evaluates the
modification charges on the basis of the submitted documents.

182
Section 11 Congestion management
This section determines the policy and procedure for congestion
management to manage the congestion of ISF smoothly and securely.

1. Fundamental items of congestion management


・TSVIUs determine the detailed procedures of congestion management
according to the rules for congestion management.
・TSVIUs commence congestion management the moment ATCs become
negative in any time span.
・When instructed by TSVIUs to reduce or cancel the power flows of the
congested IFS, AUIs will promptly comply.
・TSVIUs report the results of congestion management to CCRC.

2. Scope and order of congestion management


2-1. Scope of congestion management
All the SPFISF of VIUs and PPSs are subject to congestion
management.

2-2. Order of reduction


TSVIUs establish the order of reduction of power flows for each ISF as
follows.

(1) SPFISF other than ECSF


The scheduled power flows are controlled in the reverse order of
the first-come-first-served basis in capacity registration and
confirmation.

(2) Power flows of ECSF excluding the long-term based resources


The power flows of ECSF excluding the long-term based resources
are controlled after the above power flows according to the
principle of first-come-first-served.

When the power flows of ECSF excluding the long-term based


resources are subject to congestion management, all of them are
handled in the same order.

(3) Power flows scheduled in the day-ahead market

183
The power flows scheduled in the day-ahead market are controlled
after the power flows of Items (1) and (2) mentioned above. When
the power flows scheduled in the day-ahead market are subject to
congestion management, all of them are handled in the same order.

(4) Power flows of nationwide power interchange


As the nationwide power interchanges are the last resort to resolve
the mismatch of supply and demand for TSVIUs, they are
controlled after Items (1), (2), and (3) above. When nationwide
power interchanges are subject to congestion management,
TSVIUs control them depending on the situation.

(5) Power flows of ECSF from long-term based resources


The power flows of ECSF from long-term based resources are
controlled after all the others from the viewpoint of risk
management of investment in generation development and its
recovery period.

When the power flows of the ECSF from long-term based resources
are subject to congestion management, TSVIUs control them
depending on the situation.

3. Procedures for congestion management


3-1. Planning stage or sufficient time for congestion management
During the planning stage or when there is sufficient time for
congestion management, TSVIUs reduce or cancel all of the power flows
of ISF in the directions of congestion in the order specified in Paragraph
2-2 “Order of reduction”.

3-2. Insufficient time for congestion management, need for emergency


action
If emergency action is required for congestion management, emergency
reduction measures are taken in principle.

Moreover the measure of redispatching may be taken until the


emergency reduction measures are completed.

184
After completing the emergency reduction measures, the operation
mode will be quickly switched to the measure based on Paragraph 3-1
“Planning stage or sufficient time for congestion management”.

Emergency action for congestion management is taken in the following


cases:

・A generation outage, a loss of generation due to a power system fault,


or a loss of load causes an offset power flow to decrease, causing
congestion of ISF.
・A decrease in the operating capacity of ISF due to a system fault,
causing congestion.

4. Cautions for congestion management


4-1. Common items
The minimum unit of reduction in congestion management is the same
as that of SPFI stipulated in Paragraph 12 of Section 10 “Outline of
management of SPFI”.

4-2. Control in reverse order of priority


(1) In case of simultaneous occurrences of congestion, the power flows
of the congested ISF are controlled in the reverse order of priority
respectively. When the SPFI using several ISFs is reduced,
capacity is obtained for each SPFI and the minimum value is used.
ATCs resulting from this congestion management comply with the
procedures of Section 10 “Rules for use of IFS”

(2) As for the SPFI of the same order, the required capacity of
reduction is apportioned between them in proportion to their
capacity. In this case, the values of SPFI are rounded down to the
nearest 1kW.

5. Basic approach to cost of congestion management


If there is not sufficient time for congestion management, necessitating
emergency action, each entity who reduces its SPFI according to a load
dispatching instruction pays the back-up charges.

185
TSVIUs establish and make public the concerned back-up charges.

6. Reporting and notification of result of congestion management


6-1. Reporting to CCRC
TSVIUs inform CCRC of the following items concerning the results of
congestion management each time:

・Name of ISF of congestion management


・Period of congestion management
・Reasons for congestion
・SPFI of congestion management and its reduction value

6-2. Notification of reduction to UI


TSVIUs inform CCRC of the following items concerning the results of
congestion management each time:

・Name of ISF of congestion management


・Period of congestion management
・Reasons for congestion
・ SPFI of the concerned entity of congestion management and its
reduction value

186
Attached Paper 4-1 Input data for planning of scheduled outage, and samples of ESCJ web site and screen
No. Item Content
1 Receipt number Serial number (numbered from 0001 to 0009), Sub serial number
(The fixed number 001 is assigned for continuous operation, Receipt No.
whereas a serial number from 001 to 009 is assigned for daily
operation) (*3) Correction, addition
2 Area code ‘01’: Hokkaido, ‘02’: Tohoku, ‘03’: Tokyo, ‘04’: Chubu, ‘05’:
Hokuriku, ‘06’: Kansai, ‘07’: Chugoku, ‘08’: Shikoku, ‘09’: Kyushu Area code
3 Name of work “XXXXXXXXXXXX” (Fill in name of work) Name of work
4 Date of start of work Format: YYYYMMDDhhmm Date of start of
work_ plan
plan YYYY=Year (*2) (Fill in the blanks) Date off end of
5 Date of end of work Format: YYYYMMDDhhmm work_ plan
Date off start of
plan YYYY=Year (*2) (Fill in the blanks) work_ Actual Result
6 Date of start of work When the state of implementation of work is “’2’: Under work” or Date off end of
work_ Actual Result
Actual Result “’3’: End of work”, the blanks must be filled in.
Continuous_Daily
Format: YYYYMMDDhhmm style
YYYY= Year (*2) (Fill in the blanks) Content of work
7 Date of end of work When the state of implementation of work is “’3’: End of work”, Constrained places
Actual Result the blanks must be filled in. State of
Format: YYYYMMDDhhmm style implementation
Classification of
YYYY= Year (*2) (Fill in the blanks) application
8 Continuous/daily ‘1’: Continuous, ‘2’: Daily, ‘3’: The day Classification of
schedule
9 Content of work “XXXXXXXXXXX” (Fill in details of the operation) Reason for
10 Constrained places Fill in the interconnection facility code. modification
11 State of ‘1’: Plan, ‘2’: Under work, ‘3’: End of work, ‘4’: Cancellation, ‘5’: Applicant
implementation Suspension
At the time of state of work, the state of implementation must be
filled with “Under work” through click of “’4’: actual result” in the Delete
12th item. At the time of completion of work it must be filled with
“End of work” in the same way.
Cancel
12 Classification of ‘1’: New, ‘2’: Modification, ‘3’: Deletion, ‘4’: Actual Result (*1)
application
13 Classification of ‘1’: Annual, ‘2’: Monthly, ‘3’: Unscheduled, ‘4’: Emergency work
schedule (*1) Reference: For display by ESCJ
14 Reason for modification “XXXXXXXXXX” (Fill in the reason)
15 Applicant Set the entity code.
(*1): For the classification of schedules, the state of implementation, and the classification of the
application, refer to Table 4-4-2.
(*2): How to fill in “Year”: Use “Fiscal Year” for “Year” in a schedule and “The Year” for “Year”
indicated in the state of implementation.
(*3): When work continues for more than two fiscal years, the same receipt number is used
throughout the period of work.

187
Attached Paper 4-2 Format for submission of outage schedule

List of scheduled outages

Year/Month/Day
Applicant name:kkkkkkkkkkkkk1
Control area:kkkkkkkkk
Period of work
Area Receipt Accepted Name of Date of start of Date of end of Continuous Content of Constrained State of Classification Classificatio Reason for
work plan work plan Applicant
code number time work / Daily work places implementation of application n of schedule modification
Date of start of Date of end of work
work Actual Result Actual Result
2005/10/1 kkkk1 2005/10/1 10:10 2005/10/1 10:10 kkkkkkkk kkkkkkkk kkkkkk1 kkkk
Hokkaido 9999-999 Daily Scheduled New Unplanned
hh:mm:ss:ff Kkkk2 2005/10/1/ 10:10 2005/10/1/ 10:10 kkkkkkkk kkkkkkkk Kkkkkk2 kkkk

188
Attached Paper 4-3 Posted outage schedule and state of implementation of work on the system for publicizing of system
information

Receipt Name of Date of start Continuous Content of Constrained State of Classification Classification Reason for
Entity Date of end of work Applicant
number work of work / Daily work places implementation of application of schedule modification

XX Maintenance 2003/10/16 10:00 2003/10/17 15:00 Trunk line XX trunk XX Electric


1 Electric of XX trunk Daily Under work Actual result Monthly
maintenance line Power Co.
Power Co. line 2003/10/16 10:15

XX Inspection 2003/10/1 10:00 2003/10/18 15:00 Review of


Facility XX Electric
2 Electric CB for No.2 Continuous Plan Modification Monthly construction
inspection Power Co.
Power Co. XX line schedule

XX 2004/05/10 10:00 2004/05/11 10:00 Facility XX Electric


3 Electric XX FC Continuous FC Plan Deletion Annual
inspection Power Co.
Power Co.

XX Inspection LS 2003/10/16 10:00 2003/10/16 13:00 Facility XX trunk Completion of Emergency XX Electric
4 Electric for No.1XX - New Unscheduled
inspection line work work Power Co.
Power Co. bulk line 2003/10/16 10:00 2003/10/16 12/30

189
Attached Table 4-1 Interconnection

Interconnection Area Facility

Hokkaido - Honshu interconnected facility Hokkaido- Tohoku Hokkaido - Honshu interconnected electric power facility

Tohoku - Tokyo interconnection Tohoku - Tokyo Somafutaba Trunk Line

Sakuma FC
Tokyo - Chubu interconnected facility Tokyo - Chubu Shin-shinano FC
Higashi-shimizu FC

Chubu - Kansai interconnection Chubu - Kansai Miehigashioumi Line

Minami-fukumitsu Station, interconnected facility of Minami-fukumitsu


Chubu - Hokuriku interconnection facility Chubu - Hokuriku Sub-station

Hokuriku - Kansai interconnection Hokuriku- Kansai Echizen Reinan Line

Kansai - Chugoku interconnection Kansai - Chugoku Seiban Higashi-Okayama Line, Yamazaki Chizu Line

Kansai - Shikoku interconnection Kansai - Shikoku Anankihoku DC Trunk Line

Chugoku - Shikoku interconnection Chugoku- Shikoku Honshi interconnection

Chugoku - Kyushu interconnection Chugoku- Kyushu Kanmon interconnection

190
【Appendix】Glossary

“Loop” means that substations are interconnected with other ones or


power stations by different towerlines, forming a closed current path. It
also means operations through the loop.

“Electric station” refers to substations, power stations, switching


stations, converting stations and so forth, and sites/places of receiving
facilities of end-use customers.

“System security” is a generic term for system adequacy and power


system reliability.

“At the time of or with contingency” refers to a situation in which


electric power facilities experience or are going to experience an outage.

“Power facility” means “network facility” and “generation facility”.

“Entity concerned” means any entity of contractors, power producers,


end-use customers, or those who become involved while operating power
facilities.

“Parallel operation” means two terminal elements of power systems,


generators and so forth that are connected in parallel between the same
pair of nodes .

“Operation agreement and so forth” means agreements that describe


matters concerning system interconnection according to supply and
demand contracts, wheeling service contracts, and fundamental
agreements. (Referred to as “Dispatching Agreement Concerning…”,
“Load Dispatching Agreement”, or “Load Dispatching Arrangement”
depending upon VIUs. Paragraph 2 of Section 5 “Scope and Chain of
Load Dispatching Instruction” specifies rules for concluding “Operation
agreements and so forth” between TDSVIUs and others.)

“Under abnormal condition” refers to a situation in which failures have


occurred or are likely to occur in power systems due to salt

191
contamination, lightning, snow accumulation, and so forth. It also
means a situation in which it appears or it is decided by a system
operator that a tight or surplus balance of supply and demand in the
area cannot be resolved due to unexpected temperature fluctuations,
system failures, and/or forced outage of generation.

“System separations” means an incident in power systems that creates


an islanded system.

“Transmission/distribution facilities stopped for with efficient


operation” means facilities in power systems that ceased operating,
such as when one of three transformers stopped operating to decrease
the transmission loss during light load.

“Load dispatching instruction” means instructions issued by


TSVIUs/TSWEUs to their entities and those interconnecting with
power systems in order to maintain power quality, supply power stably,
and to ensure system security (“Load dispatching instruction” includes
automatic operations through computers, automatic fault restoration
systems and so forth at the time of operating and switching facilities).

“Congestion” refers to a situation in which power flows of ISF exceed


their ATCs during the planning stage or operation stage.

“Control area” means the power systems monitored and controlled by


each VIU.

“Demand control” refers to a situation in which partial demand is


controlled to prevent system collapse or to secure facilities under
abnormal conditions (including all control based on load dispatching
instructions (including control device) of TSVIUs and cooperation of
end-use customers).

“Load shedding” means the shutting off of partial load current (demand)
either automatically or manually to prevent system collapse under
abnormal conditions.

192
“Independent restoration operation” means operations carried out
independently by electric-power stations according to previously
established scopes and procedures. They are not subject to load
dispatching instructions during contingencies of power systems.
(“Independent restoration operation” itself is regarded as a load
dispatching instruction in some cases.)

“Automatic reclosing device” is a device that automates reclosing


transmission lines and switching to a spare line in substations. It is a
kind of automated self-restoration device designed for automatic
recovery from power system contingencies.

“Control of generation output under abnormal conditions” means output


control of some generators in order to prevent system collapse when
there is a problem with power systems. (Unlike output control for load
following by power producers during normal time, “Control of
generation output under abnormal conditions” is carried out by a load
dispatching instruction of TSVIUs as a countermeasure against
abnormal conditions.)

“Islanded system” means a system separated from the interconnected


power systems and operated independently due to a scheduled outage or
a forced outage.

“System capacity” means the sum of gross outputs of generators


connected to the power systems at a certain point of time. The system
capacity of a single system in the interconnected power system, for
instance, is obtained by adding electricity received from other areas to
the sum of generator outputs and then subtracting the amount of power
supplied to other areas.

“Generation schedule” means locational generation schedules made by


PPSs so that TSVIUs can make supply-and-demand control schedules
for fair and stable operation of their power systems.

“Supply-and-demand control schedule” means a series of schedules


produced by VIUs to secure a supply capability for

193
continuously-fluctuating demand, to balance supply and demand, and
to secure system security.

“Time span” means a divided segment of a certain period divided (such


as seasonal, week-day and holiday, day-time and night-time, and so
forth).

“SPFISF” means an individual schedule to use ISF. It is incorporated in


planned power flows when registering capacity, and making annual,
monthly, and weekly schedules, etc.

“The system for publicizing of system information” is a system installed


and operated by ESCJ. It publicizes information, such as ATC and the
scheduled outages of ISF.

“Interconnection facility” means interconnections (an AC/DC


transmission line and AC/DC converter, which interconnects between
the control areas of VIUs and whose voltage is 250kV or above) and
facilities that constitute them.

“Transmission facilities within a control area” are facilities that


compose transmission systems in the control area of VIU, excluding
interconnections.

“SOIAI” means scheduled outages within a control area that affect


ATCs of interconnections.

“Long-term based resources” refers to nuclear power, hydro-power


(excluding pumped storage hydro-power) and geothermal power
stations.

“Those subject to coordination” means VIUs other than VIUs concerned,


WEUs, and those that need to coordinate when making the scheduled
outages of interconnections (their scheduled generation and scheduled
outage of generators need to be modified).

“Outage modified or added” means modified or added scheduled outages

194
other than the original scheduled outage.

“Coordinating meeting of scheduled outage” refers to meetings held by


the joint working group of CIPSO, which is one of the committees of
experts of ESCJ, for final opinion adjustment and agreement regarding
the scheduled outage planning of interconnection facilities and network
facilities within the control area affecting the ATCs of ISF based on the
results of earlier coordination by TSVIUs/TTWEUs. (These meetings
are organized by TSVIUs/TSWEUs and neutral members. PPSs who are
subject to coordination of generation schedules and scheduled outage of
generation can also participate in the meetings as observers.)

“Scheduled outage” means outage schedules drawn up for annual or


monthly plans.

“Congestion management” collectively refers to the management of


power flow control to clear congestion.

“Minimum load” means the minimum value of generation output for


continuous operation determined by the specifications and so forth of
each generator.

“Capacity confirmation” means that the wheeling service contract is


concluded and that the use of ISF every 30 minutes each week is
scheduled.

“System user” means users who supply and demand electricity through
power systems.

“Capacity registration” means that the priority order of interconnection


use is determined by the time of registration and that the use of ISF is
finally scheduled, incooperating ASPFISF in planned power flows of
ISF.

“Power shedding” means that some generators are shut off or their
output is controlled in an emergency to prevent the system from
collapsing when there is a problem with the power systems.

195
“Loss of towerline” refers to a situation in which towerlines connecting
substations with power-stations and substations, cannot transfer
electricity completely due to failures on the lines.

“Day-time” means the hours from 8 a.m. to 10 p.m.

“Night-time” means the hours from 10 p.m. to 8 a.m. the next day. (In
case of ATCs and so forth of SPFISF, from midnight to 8 a.m. and from
10 p.m. to midnight the same day)

“Duration of extra-low demand” means periods of extra-low demand,


such as the year-end and New-Year holidays, the holiday week between
late April and early May.

“Maximum generation unit” means a generator whose rated output is


the largest of all the generators or a group of generators that become
disconnected during a single line outage whose total capacity is the
maximum of all the generators in the control area of the VIU (excluding
those that stop operating as a result of cascading of line outage).

“First-come-first-served” means that the priority of use of ISF is given


based on the time of capacity registration. (However, priority can be
given to existing contracts, new contracts of long-term based resources
and resources constructed simultaneously together with ISF,
nationwide power interchanges, transactions in the spot market exempt
from time order.)

“SPFI” means the amount of energy used every 30 minutes through


interconnections on the day determined by TSVIUs on the basis of
SPFISF.

“Offset power flow” means a scheduled power flow of ISF in the


direction opposite to the total scheduled power flow of the ISF.

“Control in the reverse order of priority” means a method of congestion


management to control (decrease or cancel) the capacity confirmed in

196
the reverse order of the principle of first-come-first served.

“Emergency reduction measure” means a method of congestion


management to control the wheeling power flows for which controlling
is highly effective in accordance with the load dispatching instructions
of TSVIUs regardless of the first-come-first-served principle. This is
carried out to maintain system security at the time of emergency.

“Re-dispatching” means a method of congestion management to control


the power flows in the direction of congestion by increasing or
decreasing the generator output at both ends of the congested section
and causing an offset power to flow in accordance with the load
dispatching instructions of TSVIUs. This is carried out to maintain
system security at the time of emergency.

197
Chapter 5. Rules of system development (high voltage)
Section 1. Policy for criteria for system development
Ways of system enhancement need to be studied to secure a stable
supply of electricity when system security of the electricity supply
system cannot be maintained even through the maximum utilization of
existing facilities.

For this reason, the distribution sectors of VIUs (hereinafter referred to


as “DSVIUs”) are required to set criteria for system development.

In the specific cases shown below, DSVIUs examine measures for


efficient system development:.

・When new supply or demand facilities are installed


・When it is likely that system security will not be satisfied as
demand increases or new power sources are installed or existing
ones scrapped
・When it is likely that a fault current flowing during a phase fault of
power systems will exceed the permissible levels of existing
systems
・When it is judged that system development is profitable because
the cost of maintaining existing systems is high

198
Section 2. Planning of system development
1. Policy for timing of system development planning
DSVIUs must complete the system development necessitated by greater
supply and demand and so forth within the required time span.

Because of this, DSVIUs need to draw up plans for system development


in order to secure a time schedule for construction work considering the
following:

・A period for site acquisition in consideration of area circumstances


(*1)
・ A period during which the construction can be carried out,
including the amount of time for planned outages of facilities
necessary for that construction work and so forth
・A period necessary for various procedures outside/inside of an office
(*2)
・An appointed day of delivery of machineries and materials
・Advance execution of construction (*3) in accordance with internal
and external related constructions
・A step-by-step advancement of a large-scale/widespread system
development plan

(*1) Area circumstances: city developments, city development


planning, laws and regulations related to city developments
(natural park laws, river laws, forest laws, city development laws,
cultural properties protection laws, etc.)
(*2) Various procedures outside/inside of an office: various
procedures under laws and regulations (construction planning
reports regulated by Electricity Utilities Industry Law,
assessments of environment regulated by ordinances and so forth,
applications for permission of exclusive use of road regulated by
road law, and so on)
(*3)Prior execution of construction: Prior execution of constructions
(ex: duct construction due to regulation of road digging,
construction of duct of suspension under bridge in accordance
with construction of bridge) in accordance with public enterprise
projects (road development projects, bridge development projects,

199
joint culvert projects, and so forth), large-scale land development
projects, and re-development projects.

2. Valuation basis for countermeasure plan


DSVIUs compare various measures and choose appropriate ones in
order to maintain system security when drawing up plans for system
development, after considering all the following factors:

a. Economy
・Construction cost of distribution facilities
・Cost of operation and maintenance
・Distribution loss
・Future expansion, improvement step, etc.

b. Adaptability to social environment


・Overhead wire construction restricted by regulations
・Site circumstance, etc.

c. System of maintenance/operation
・Convenience of maintenance
・Swift action in case of trouble, etc.

d. Level of difficulty in construction execution

3. Phase fault current


When a phase fault current increases, the following problems can be
expected:

・Capacity shortage of distribution lines and facilities in series such


as circuit breakers
・Damage to facilities

Therefore, when making plans for system development, DSVIUs need to


calculate the fault current during three-phase short circuiting assuming
the severest conditions of the power systems concerned. If the fault
currents calculated above exceed the circuit breaking capabilities of the

200
existing facilities, measures for the phase fault currents need to be
studied. Fault currents must not exceed the allowable maximum values
of phase fault currents shown in Paragraph 4 of Section 3 “Tolerable
maximum value of phase fault current”.

201
Section 3. Policy for conditions for system development
1. Voltage class and electric system
As for the electric system, a three-phase three-wire system, which is
easy for voltage transformation and suitable for expansion of
transmission capability, is used in principle.

There are two standards of system frequency, one used in the eastern
part of Japan and the other in the western part for historical reasons. It
is necessary to adjust these conditions for the same power system. The
standard frequencies are set at 50Hz and 60Hz, respectively.

Standard voltage classes are established at each VIU for historical


reasons. When developing the system, appropriate voltage and electric
systems are adopted in consideration of coordination with existing
systems and their effective application.

DSVIUs establish and make public the standard system voltage classes.

2. Neutral grounding system


A neutral grounding is required to prevent abnormal voltages, and
speed up/secure operations of protective relay systems when ground
faults occur in power systems.

In principle, a neutral point resistively grounding system or isolated


neutral system is adopted to suppress ground fault currents. As for
cable systems, a compensating reactor grounding system is also
considered because of a large risk of abnormal voltages in the power
systems at the time of ground faults due to high ground capacitance in
the cable systems.

As for the specifications of grounding devices, appropriate grounding


impedance is required to prevent over-voltages and secure operations of
protective relay systems at the time of contingencies.

DSVIUs establish and make public appropriate grounding systems after


taking into account all the conditions of existing facilities such as a
large charging current in the cable systems, when choosing a grounding

202
system.

3. System configuration
(1) System configuration
The standard distribution system is a radial and partitioned
interconnection system.

(2) Choosing the number of circuits


The number of circuits on distribution lines is one in principle.

4. Tolerable maximum value of phase fault current


Technical examinations are necessary because of a risk of damage to
existing facilities when fault currents exceed their tolerable maximum
values at the time of phase fault of distribution lines.

Because of this, it is necessary to determine the maximum values of


phase fault currents that can be permitted in power systems and also
circuit breaking capabilities based on them in order to securely isolate
the parts that have failed.

It is necessary to coordinate these tolerable maximum values of phase


fault currents with all the facilities of power systems. Therefore,
DSVIUs establish and make public the tolerable maximum values of
phase fault currents.

5. Protective relay system


DSVIUs need to protect power systems appropriately, not only
preventing damage to the facilities of power systems, and personal and
public safety, but also considering the efficient development of power
systems.

Appropriate protective relay systems are chosen to protect facilities


from damage such as fusion cutting of distribution lines, considering
such factors as transfer capability and the amount of time required to
break a circuit by a circuit breaker.

They are also chosen based on system conditions affecting the operating

203
sensitivity of protective systems such as a neutral-grounding system.

An appropriate relay system needs to be chosen after considering


coordination with existing protective relay systems and other factors.
Because of this, DSVIUs establish and make public standardized
protective relay systems.

204
Section 4. Policy for system development
1. Development scale of distribution facilities
DSVIUs need to choose the development scale of distribution facilities
from all the viewpoints of future system configuration, increase of
demand, and economy because of the huge investment involved and the
fact that these facilities, once constructed, will be used for a long time.

(1) Development scale


When choosing the development scale of distribution facilities, the
factors shown below should be taken into consideration.

a. Future outlook
・Increase of demand (*1)
・Final scale (*2) of distribution facilities
・Future system configuration (*3), etc.

b. Technology
・Voltage drop, phase fault current, etc.

c. Economy
・Construction cost of distribution facilities
・Distribution loss
・Process of development and replacement, etc.

(*1) Increase of demand: Factors contributing to local demand


increases, such as the trend of past demand increase,
community development, and construction of an industrial
complex are taken into consideration.
(*2) Final scale: The number of pipes per duct, the distribution
capacity, and so forth according to the capacity of the final
configuration (the number of banks)
(*3) Future system configuration: Established to ensure efficiency
for future electric power supply and demand, considering
predicted area demand, power resource distribution, present
system configuration and actual conditions of facilities.

205
(2) Standard scale of facilities
DSVIUs establish and make public the standard scale of the
facilities as follows, as it is necessary to coordinate each capacity of
facilities to achieve the efficient construction of distribution
systems:

a. Distribution line
・Type of electric wires
・Size of electric wires, etc.

2. Distribution route
DSVIUs choose distribution routes based on the policies shown below.

Overhead lines are used in principle from the viewpoint of economy


when constructing distribution lines. However, underground
distribution lines can be used in the following cases:

・ Overhead lines are difficult to construct due to regulations,


technology, site situation and other factors.

Distribution routes are chosen after taking into account the following
factors as they pass through various areas with different surroundings.

(1) Factors to be considered when choosing overhead distribution


routes

a. Future outlook
・Future system configuration
・Trend of demand distribution, etc.

b. Site and surroundings


・Natural conditions
・Harmony with social surroundings
・Difficulty in site acquisition
・Influence of disasters, etc.

c. Construction/maintenance

206
・Degree of difficulty in construction and maintenance, etc.

d. Economy
・Construction cost, etc.

(2) Factors to be considered when choosing underground distribution


routes
The following factors also are taken into consideration in addition
to those for overhead distribution routes:

e. Coordination with city planning and so forth


・Coordination with city planning
・Coordination with plans for road acquisition
・Coordination with joint culvert development planning, etc.

f. Technology
・ Influence on the distribution capacity of underground power
cables from adjacent parallel cables of same route (duct), etc.

207
Section 5. Criteria of system security
All the components of power systems from power stations down to ends
of network systems should be coordinated for maintaining system
security.

This means that DSVIUs need to draw up plans for system development
in a way that satisfies criteria of system security for all facilities in
service and abnormal conditions (N-1 contingency), taking into account
the frequency and influence of system contingencies.

1. All facilities in service


Criteria of system security with all facilities in service

・The power flow does not exceed the rated capability of the facilities.
・System voltage is maintained properly.

2. Power system contingency (N-1 contingency)


Criteria of system security required at the time of a single contingency
of the facilities. (N-1 contingency (*1))

・ The influences of blackouts due to N-1 contingency must be


sufficiently small.
・In the event of an N-1 contingency on distribution lines and the like
that interconnect power systems with generators, its influence
must be confined to limited power generation failure (*2).

(*1) N-1 contingency: In principle, N-1 contingency means a single


contingency of a circuit.
(*2) Limited power generation failure: A loss (disconnection) of
generation

Loss of generation: This means a loss (disconnection) of a generator


due to N-1 contingency on the distribution lines radially connected to
generators and other devices.

208
Section 6. How to evaluate system security
DSVIUs need to evaluate whether the plan for power system
development satisfies the criteria of system security under normal
conditions and abnormal conditions (N-1 contingency), considering such
factors as a demand increase, newly-installed/additional generating
facilities, and retirement of existing generators.

They evaluate their system security by the following procedures.

1. Conditions of assessment
Conditions for maximum currents on distribution lines assumed by
DSVIUs when making plans for system development ought to be as
severe as possible within a conceivable range of consideration.

DSVIUs establish and make public the policy for the assumed demand
and generation for conditions of assessment as shown below.

a. Assumed demand (*1)


In principle, average demand for highest three days in certain
period is used. Light demand is also used for assessment when the
power flows are heavier at the time of light demand, as those from
a substation with both light demand and flat output of generation.

b. Assumed generators
Assumed generators are confirmed (contracted or planned)
between DSVIUs and the entities that interconnect their
generation facilities with power systems. Generation outputs are
in principle set up so that outputs are the heaviest within a
conceivable range of operation, taking into account the operating
patterns of generators based on their roles, characteristics,
contracts, etc..

(*1) Assumed demand: Corresponding to network systems (electric


power supplied through distribution facilities of VIUs)

209
2. Policy for application of rated/overloaded capacity
It is necessary to determine the rated/overloaded capacities to protect
facilities such as distribution lines from damage.

The rated capacity is determined by the thermal limit below which the
facilities can continuously operate.

The overloaded capacity is determined by the thermal limit below which


the remaining facilities can operate during a limited period in the event
of a single contingency.

Currents on distribution systems with all distribution facilities in


service are kept below the rated capacity; they are set by considering
the overloaded capacity in the event of a single contingency of parallel
operating facilities.

Regarding the capacity under normal conditions and the policies for
rated and overloaded capacities of distribution facilities, DSVIUs
establish and make them public according to the contingency
procedures of network switching that vary depending on the
configurations of power systems and other factors.

210
Chapter 6. Rules for System Interconnection including Wheeling Service
(high voltage)
Section 1. A place where applications for system interconnection are
accepted and policy for work flow
VIUs follow the procedures described below concerning places where
applications for wheeling service are accepted and the policy for work
flow from the viewpoint of fairness and transparency.

a. A place where an application is accepted


VIUs set up places in TDSVIUs to accept applications for wheeling
services, in order to prohibit the use of information concerning
wheeling services for purposes other than the specified ones.

b. Work flow
The work flow from interconnection examination to
commencement of wheeling service carried out by TDSVIUs is
standardized as shown in Attached Paper 6-1.

As for power generation facilities owned by VIUs and interconnected


systems on the demand side, VIUs also need to clarify places where
applications are accepted and perform their tasks in accordance with
the work flow as shown in Attached Paper 6-1 from the viewpoint of
fairness and transparency.

TDSVIUs establish and make public the places where applications for
system interconnection are accepted and the work flows according to
such matters as the organizational structure, divisions of duties,
procedures for site acquisition and survey for construction.

As for the system interconnection of other power producers, VIUs


establish and make public the places where applications for system
interconnection are accepted and the work flows depending on
individual contracts from the viewpoint of transparency.

211
Section 2. Information on power producers and end-use customers required
for interconnection examination
TDSVIUs request information on the facilities of power producers and
end-use customers from an applicant for interconnection examination
concerning the wheeling service.

An applicant for interconnection examination provides TDSVIUs with


the information listed in Paragraphs 1 and 2 below.

For interconnection examinations concerning other power producers


and end-use customers, an applicant for interconnection examination
provides TDSVIUs with information equivalent to those listed in
Paragraphs 1 and 2 below.

When an application is made, TDSVIUs consult with the applicant for


interconnection examination over necessary matters.

1. Power producer
In principle, information on the facilities of power producers requested
by TDSVIUs is as shown in attached Table 6-1 concerning the following
items:

a. Name of power producer, generation site, and receiving point;


b. If power generating installations are located outside a franchised
area of a VIU, a contract for the cross-area wheeling service
concluded with the VIU other than the VIU concerned or contents
of the application;
c. Generating system, output power, detailed specifications of
generator, various parameters of step-up transformer;
d. Maximum and minimum values of receiving power;
e. Voltage at a receiving point;
f. Loaded/receiving facilities at power generation site;
g. Desired commencement date of wheeling service;
h. Number of circuits (regular, standby);
i. Name and address of applicant.

When a receiving point is an interconnection, c, e, f, and h are not

212
required.

When requesting a cross-area wheeling service of electricity, the


following information is also to be supplied:

j. Name of the entity that receives electricity delivered through


cross-area wheeling service of electricity, and a point of delivery.

TDSVIUs establish and make public the required information and its
necessity except for the information on items shown in attached Table
6-1.

2. End-use customer
In principle, information on the facilities of end-use customers
requested by TDSVIUs is as shown in attached Table 6-2 concerning the
following items:

a. Name of end-use customer, location of demand, and servicing


point;
b. Contract power;
c. Voltage at servicing point;
d. Loaded/receiving facilities at location of demand;
e. Desired commencement date of wheeling service;
f. Number of circuits (regular, standby);
g. Name and address of applicant.

If the end-use customer has generation facilities (excluding those for


emergency not interconnected to power systems), the following
information is also to be supplied:

h. Generating system of generation facilities, power output, detailed


specification of generation, various parameters of step-up
transformer.

TDSVIUs establish and make public the required information and its
necessity except for the information on items shown in attached Table
6-2.

213
Section 3 Required period for interconnection examination of generation
facilities
When TDSVIUs accept an application for interconnection examination
of generation facilities, they respond as follows regarding the results of
examination.

They provide the result of interconnection examination (the contents


stipulated in Section 5 “Contents of response to interconnection
examination”) immediately after completion of the examination and
within 3 months after the acceptance of an application.

If it takes more than 3 months to respond, the TDSVIUs explain the


reason for the delay, the state of progress, and the likely response date
to the applicant.

214
Section 4. Required period for interconnection examination of end-use
customer
TDSVIUs, regarding the start of wheeling services, need to clarify whether
any construction will be required or not and, if required, a standard amount
of time for responding according to the types of constructions. They establish
and make public these conditions.

If it takes longer than the standard response time, TDSVIUs explain the
reasons for the delay.

215
Section 5. Contents of response to interconnection examination
When accepting applications, TDSVIUs respond to the applicants for
interconnection examination concerning wheeling services with the
items listed in Paragraphs 1 and 2 below in order to provide them with
the information required for assessing profitability.

When accepting applications, TDSVIUs also respond to the applicants


for interconnection examination concerning power producers and
end-use customers other than those mentioned above with items
equivalent to those listed in Paragraphs 1 and 2 below.

When responding, they explain to these applicants the necessary


matters, stating for instance that their responses are reasonable from
the viewpoint of technology and economy.

1. Power producer
・Feasibility of system interconnection for the receiving power requested
by the applicant for interconnection examination
・Outline of system interconnection construction
・Roughly estimated construction cost and its basis
・Roughly estimated contribution to construction cost
・Required period
・Countermeasure required for a power producer
・Preconditions
・Restrictions on operation

2. End-use customer
・Feasibility of system interconnection for the supply power requested
by the applicant for interconnection examination
・Outline of system interconnection construction
・Roughly estimated contribution to construction cost
・Required period
・Measures required for an end-use customer
・Preconditions
・Restrictions on operation

When generation facilities (excluding those for emergency and

216
disconnecting from power systems) are installed at locations of demand,
a reply will also be made on the measures required for those system
interconnections in addition to the items above.

217
Section 6. How to determine preparatory period for end-use customer
Regarding the preparatory periods, i.e., the duration from the
acceptance of application to commencement of the actual wheeling
service, TDSVIUs classify them into several types according to the
constructions necessary for the wheeling service and so forth, taking
into account various conditions such as necessity of meter change,
introduction of automatic meter reading system, and installation of
communication lines required for introducing a support system for
load following. TDSVIUs establish and make public the standardized
preparatory periods of some typical types.

When a wheeling service cannot be commenced within the publicized


standard preparatory period, the TDSVIUs also explain the reason to
the applicant.

218
Section 7. Fundamental policy for constructing facilities between existing
transmission and distribution facility and facility of power
producer and end-use customer
When making plans for the development of systems from facilities of
power producers and end-use customers down to existing transmission
and distribution facilities owned by VIUs as they examine
interconnections, TDSVIUs need to achieve efficiency and rationality
and maintain system security at the same time. In this regard,
TDSVIUs establish and make public the detailed requirements
necessary to determine system configurations and the scale of facilities
according to the fundamental policies shown below.

1. Connecting point with existing transmission facilities and distribution


route
TDSVIUs choose a connecting point with existing facilities and a
distribution route by considering the following items:

a. Future outlook
・Future system configuration
・Trend of demand distribution, etc.

b. Site and environment


・Natural conditions
・Coordination with social environment
・Degree of difficulty in site acquisition
・Influence of various disasters, etc.

c. Construction and maintenance


・Degree of difficulty in construction and maintenance, etc.

d. Economy
・Construction cost, etc.

TDSVIUs explain to individual applicants reasons for the choice of a


connecting point with existing transmission and distribution facilities
and a distribution route.

219
2. Receiving/servicing voltage
TDSVIUs establish and make public the standardized voltages
according to a contract power and a contract receiving power.

When they choose receiving/servicing voltages, they do so considering


the standard voltages above and also the state of transmission and
distribution facilities, and the specific situation of power producers and
end-use customers.

When they choose voltages other than standardized ones, they explain
to individual applicants the selected receiving/servicing voltages and
the reason for the selection.

3. Number of circuits
When TDSVIUs choose the number of circuits of distribution lines
connecting the facilities of power producers and end-use customers with
existing transmission systems owned by VIUs, in principle they choose
one circuit, or two if requested by power producers or end-use customers
for supplemental distribution facilities.

TDSVIUs establish and make public exceptions to this principle.

TDSVIUs explain to individual applicants the selected number of


circuits and the reason for the selection.

4. Scale of facility to be developed


When TDSVIUs choose a development scale of facilities that connect the
facilities of power producers and end-use customers with existing
transmission systems owned by VIUs, in principle they choose the least
scale that allows the transmission of contract power and contract
receiving power, by considering the following:

・Thermal limit
・Voltage drop
・Phase fault current

If they do not choose the least scale, TDSVIUs explain to individual

220
applicants the selected scale of facilities and the reason for selection.

5. Type of distribution line


When TDSVIUs choose the type of distribution line connecting the
facilities of power producers and end-use customers with existing
transmission systems owned by VIUs, in principle they choose overhead
distribution lines from the viewpoint of economy.

Underground cables, however, can be chosen depending on the


conditions as follows:

・ Overhead distribution lines are difficult to construct due to


regulations, technology, site situation, and economy.

TDSVIUs establish and make public exceptions to this principle.

When choosing system interconnections through a distribution line


other than overhead lines, TDSVIUs also explain the reason to the
applicant.

221
Section 8. Policy for technical requirements for interconnection of
generation facilities
Technical requirements for system interconnection of generation
facilities are as follows. These requirements are applied regardless of
the existence or nonexistence of reverse power flow (*1), when a
generation facility is installed at an end-use customer.

(*1) “Reverse power flow” means a power flow from the yard where a
generator is installed to the power systems, when the generator
output is larger than the demand power in the yard

1. Electric system
When a generation facility with a different electric system is
interconnected with existing power systems, it may hinder the use of
electricity or electric facilities for others.

Note that the electric system of generation facilities is to be the


alternating-current (AC) three-phase and three-wire system and that
its voltage and frequency are the same as those of the interconnected
power systems when generators are interconnected.

However, a system different from the electric system of the


interconnected power systems can be used when either of the following
applies:

a. When the capacity of generation facility is so small compared with


the maximum receiving power that the influence from phase
unbalance can be neglected.
b. The inverter is shut off or the power facility is disconnected as
measures against over-voltage caused by load unbalance when a
circuit breaker is opened at the receiving point in a situation where
a generation facility with a single-phase two-wire system of 200V
interconnects with the power systems of a single-phase three-wire
system.

2. Power factor
When generators are interconnected with the system, it is necessary to

222
control reactive power in coordination with the generation facilities of
VIUs and others so as to maintain the appropriate system voltage.

When a new generator is interconnected, the power factor of the


generation facilities is to be as follows.

In principle, the power factor of generation facilities should be 0.85 or


more at the receiving point. Further, it should not be a leading power
factor when viewed from the power systems to prevent the voltage from
increasing (or a lagging power factor when viewed from generation
facilities).

However, the power factor can be below 0.85 when either of the
following applies:

a. It is unavoidable for preventing voltage increase. (In this case, the


power factor at the receiving point can be controlled up to 0.8.)
b. An inverter with small output is used or the power factor at the
receiving point is deemed appropriate. (In this case, the power factor
of generation facilities is over 0.85 when controlling reactive power
and is over 0.95 when not controlling it.)

If a reverse power flow does not exist, in principle the power factor of
generation facilities at the servicing point of end-use customers should
be 0.85 or more in lagging power factor in order to prevent the voltage
from decreasing. Further, it should not be a leading power factor when
viewed from power systems (or a lagging power factor when viewed
from generation facilities).

3. Measures for voltage fluctuations


If the system voltage cannot be properly maintained due to voltage
fluctuations on power systems when a generator is interconnected,
there may be a negative impact on the stable facility operation.

In principle, those who interconnect a generation facility with power


systems need to take the following measures to control the voltage in
order to prevent deviation from the appropriate system voltage when

223
generators are connected to the system.

・If a loss of generation may cause the voltage of end-use customers


interconnecting at low voltage to deviate from the appropriate
voltage value (101±6V, 202±20V) when connected to high voltage
distribution lines, measures are taken to automatically limit the
load. If this measure is ineffective, more distribution lines are used
or exclusive-use lines are connected.

・If a reverse power flow from generation may cause the voltage of
end-use customers interconnecting at low voltage to deviate from
the appropriate voltage value (101±6V, 202±20V), automatic
voltage control will take place. If this measure is ineffective, more
distribution lines are used or exclusive-use lines are connected.

・When using synchronous generators, they should be of the types


with damping winding (including a synchronous generator without
damping winding that has the hunting-prevention effect
equivalent to or more than that of the damping winding type). At
the same time, automatic synchronism detection devices need to be
installed. If the system voltage may deviate from the proper value
(within 10% of the normal value) due to the voltage dip while being
paralleled in (induction generators are used), current limiting
reactors or similar devices need to be installed. However, if such
measures are still ineffective synchronous generators will be
required.

・When self-commutated inverters are used, they should be of the


type having an automatically synchronizing function. When
line-commutated inverters are used but the system voltage still
deviates from the proper value (within 10% of the normal value)
due to voltage dip while being paralleled in, current limiting
reactors or similar devices need to be installed. If such measures
are still ineffective self-commutated power inverters will be
required.

・If there is a possibility that generator output fluctuations or voltage

224
fluctuations caused by frequent parallel in/out will bring about
voltage flicker and other problems for other end-use customers,
measures are taken to control voltage fluctuations or reduce the
frequency of parallel in/out.

4. Measures for power quality


Deterioration of power quality due to system interconnection of a
generation facility may hinder the use of electricity and electric
facilities for others.

Therefore, those who interconnect a generation facility with power


systems need to take measures to prevent deviation from the standard
power quality in the case of system interconnection.

4-1. Harmonic suppression measures


As systems are interconnected with generation facilities, an inflow of
harmonic current into power systems may cause a harmonic strain on
the voltage wave form of power systems, damaging electric facilities as a
result.

Therefore, those who interconnect a generation facility with power


systems take necessary measures against harmonics during system
interconnections according to either of the following policies:

(1) Harmonic suppression measures in conformity with the facilities of


end-use customers
When taking harmonic suppression measures in conformity with
the facilities of end-use customers, Paragraph 1-1 of Section 9
“Measures for harmonic suppression” is applied.

(2) Individual harmonic suppression measures for generation facilities


When an inverter is installed, a harmonic inflow current from a
converter to power systems (filter is contained) is less than 5% of
the integrated current strain and 3% of each harmonic current
strain.

TDSVIUs establish and make public these policies concerning

225
suppression measures for harmonic inflow current to power systems
according to above (1) or (2).

4-2. Other measures for power quality


When including demand facilities, Paragraph 1 of Section 9 “Measures
to secure power quality” will apply.

5. Countermeasures for phase fault current


When a generation facility interconnects with power systems, the
short-circuit capacity increases. If existing circuit breakers cannot
break the circuits in contingencies when a phase fault current exceeds
their capability as result of the above, effective measures need to be
taken.

If the short-circuit capacity of power systems increases and a phase


fault current may exceed the circuit breaking capability of the other
circuit breakers as generation facilities interconnect with the systems,
those who interconnect generation facilities with the power systems
need to install equipment to limit the phase fault current (for example,
current limiting reactor). If such measures are not effective, other
short-circuit capacity countermeasures including interconnection to
different substations and transmission lines of higher voltage need to be
taken.

6. Protective relay system


Protective relay systems required for system interconnection of
generation facilities shall be coordinated with those of interconnected
power systems and others from the viewpoint of personal and public
safety, power systems security, prevention of damage to electric facilities,
and efficient development of transmission facilities.

In principle, the following protective relay systems are to be installed.

When including demand facilities, this technical requirement will also


apply to them.

a. In order to protect power systems from a failure of generation

226
facilities, protective relays are installed as follows:

・When the voltage of generation facilities increases to an abnormal


level, an over-voltage relay capable of detecting it and
disconnecting generation facilities from power systems within a
specified time period is installed. However, if the generation
facilities are equipped with a protective device for such detection
and protection, its installation can be omitted.
・When the voltage of generation facilities decreases to an abnormal
level, an under-voltage relay capable of detecting it and
disconnecting generation facilities from the power systems within
a specified time period is installed. However, if the generation
facilities are equipped with a protective device for such detection
and protection, its installation can be omitted.

b. In order to protect power systems from a phase fault, protective


relays are installed as follows:

・When using synchronous generators, a short-circuit directional


relay capable of detecting any phase fault on the interconnected
systems and disconnecting the generation facilities from the power
systems concerned is installed; and
・When using induction generators or inverters, an under-voltage
relay capable of detecting any abnormal voltage drop of generators
and disconnecting them from the interconnected power systems in
case of a phase fault in the interconnected systems is installed.

c. In order to protect power systems from ground faults on them, a


ground fault over-voltage relay is employed. However, if any of the
following conditions is satisfied, installation of the relay can be
omitted:

・A ground fault of the interconnected systems can be detected by a


ground fault over-voltage relay installed at the outlet of the
generator;
・ The output of the generation facilities with an inverter
interconnecting with a low voltage line within a site is far smaller

227
than the site load, and islanding can be detected, stopped and
disconnected quickly by a device with islanding detection function.

d. If there is a reverse power flow, an over/under frequency relay and


a transfer tripping protection or a device with islanding detection
function (including more than one active type) which satisfies all of
the following requirements are installed. An over frequency relay
can be omitted when interconnected with a line for exclusive use:

・It can detect islanding within a required period without fail, taking
into account the system impedance and load situation.
・Its sensitivity does not cause frequent unnecessary parallel out.
・An active signal does not influence power systems substantially.

A transfer tripping protection or a device with islanding detection


function (including more than one active type) can be omitted only
when an over/under frequency relay can detect and protect the
islanding quickly and without fail at a wind farm using an
induction generator. However, if the above omission requirements
cannot be satisfied because of a change in the status of the power
systems, those who interconnect the generator with power systems
need to install the above devices.

e. If there is no reverse power flow, a reverse power relay and


under-frequency relay are installed in order to prevent islanding.
However, if a reverse power relay can detect and protect in case of
interconnection with a line for exclusive use, an under-frequency
relay can be omitted.

If the output capacity of generation facilities with an inverter


interconnecting with a low voltage line within a site is far smaller
than the site load and islanding can be detected, stopped and
disconnected quickly by a device with islanding detection function
(including more than one passive/active type), a reverse power
relay can be omitted.

TDSVIUs establish and make public the standard protective relay

228
systems and the policies for the additional installation of protective
relay systems.

7. Neutral point grounding system


When necessary for grounding at a neutral point of generation facilities
or interconnection facilities on a high voltage side, those who
interconnect generation facilities with high voltage distribution systems
consult with TDSVIUs and adopt a grounding system designated by
TDSVIUs. TDSVIUs establish and make public the standard policy for
the case mentioned above.

8. Automatic load shedding device


When there is a possibility of overloading the interconnected
distribution lines at the time of a loss of generation and so forth, those
who interconnect the generation facilities with power systems need to
take measures that automatically limit the load.

9. Device to confirm no-voltage on distribution line


A device designed to confirm no voltage on distribution lines is installed
at the outlet of distribution lines from a substation for distribution in
order to prevent faults at the time of automatic reclosing. However, such
a device can be omitted if either of the following items is satisfied:

(1) The installer of the generation facility does not require automatic
reclosing because of connection to a line for exclusive use

(2) Either of the following conditions is satisfied when there is a


reverse power flow:

a. An transfer tripping protection and a device with islanding


detection function (only active type) are installed and each of
them disconnects power systems using different circuit breakers.
b. Devices with two or more islanding detection functions
(including one or more active type) are installed and each of them
disconnects power systems using different circuit breakers.
c. A device with islanding detection function (only active type) and
a reverse power relay whose setting value is less than the

229
minimum load of distribution lines while the generators are in
operation and each of them disconnects power systems using
different circuit breakers, are installed.

(3) Either of the following conditions is satisfied when there is no


reverse power flow:

a. The conditions of Item (2) above


b. A protective relay, current transformer, voltage transformer,
circuit breaker, and a wiring of power source for control
concerning system interconnection are connected in dual series
and yet sequentially, allowing them to back each other up.
However, one of the above-mentioned dual systems can be
replaced by one or more of the following methods:
・The protective relays of one of the above-mentioned dual systems
can be made of the under power relays only;
・One current transformer can be combinedly used in the 1st and
2nd series when an under-power relay is installed at the end of a
current transformer; and
・One voltage transformer can be combinedly used in the 1st and
2nd series when an under-voltage relay is installed at the end of a
voltage transformer.

10. Telephone facility for security communication


When a circuit breaker for system interconnection kicks in because of
an on-site problem, power systems, and so forth, those who operate
generation facilities and TDSVIUs communicate with each other
promptly and accurately.

Telephone facilities for security communication (such as private


telephone facilities for security communication or a telephone of a
leased line for exclusive use of a telecommunications company) need to
be installed between them. However, telephone facilities for security
communication may use any subscribed phones or cellular phones if all
the following conditions are satisfied:

・A system that allows direct communication with engineers not

230
passing through the exchange of one who operates generation
facilities is introduced (not a switchboard number system via the
exchange, but a single number system directly connected to the
technical office) and it is permanently installed at the place of
maintenance /supervision of generation facilities;
・A system capable of interrupting even while the number is engaged
(for example, the so-called catch-phone system) is introduced;
・A system that allows communication even in case of outage; and
・It is clearly specified in a safety regulation that if communication
with the TDSVIU concerned cannot be made in the event of
disasters or other problems, generation facilities are disconnected
or cease to operate until the communication is recovered.

11. Prevention of reverse power flow through main transformer


As a power flow from a high voltage side to a special high voltage side
through a main transformer for distribution (hereinafter referred to as
“a reverse power flow through a main transformer”) may cause some
problems in voltage management and protection coordination of
distribution systems, it is important to prevent such a power flow
through a main transformer.

To make sure that a generation facility with a reverse power flow will
not always cause such a reverse power flow through a main transformer,
the occurrence of the flow is judged based on generation output and load
patterns when interconnections are examined. If it is deemed that a
reverse power flow through a main transformer is likely to occur,
measures to control generators and similar actions will be taken.

231
Section 9. Policy for technical requirements for interconnection of demand
facilities
Technical requirements for system interconnection of demand facilities
are shown below. As to electric systems and telephone facilities for
security communication, Section 8 “Policy for technical requirements for
interconnection of generation facilities” applies.

1. Measures to secure power quality


Deterioration of power quality due to system interconnection of demand
facilities may hinder the use of electricity and electric facilities for
others. Therefore, those who interconnect demand facilities with power
systems need to take measures to prevent deviation from the standard
value concerning power quality in the case of system interconnection.

1-1. Measures for harmonic suppression


An inflow of harmonic current into power systems in case of system
interconnection of demand facilities may cause a harmonic strain on the
voltage wave form of power systems and also hinder the operation of
electric facilities. Therefore, those who interconnect demand facilities
which cause a harmonic current in power systems need to take the
following measures in case of its system interconnection:

(1) Scope
a. A party that receives electricity from the power systems of 6.6kV
and whose total capacity of harmonics considering the harmonics
generation probability by the harmonics generator type
(hereinafter referred to as “Equivalent capacity”) is over 50kVA
(hereinafter referred to as “Specified end-use customer”)
b. Harmonics generating facilities subject to calculation of the
equivalent capacity mentioned above are those other than
facilities covered by “Guideline for measures for reducing
harmonics from electrical appliances and multipurpose
appliances”
c. An addition or renewal of such harmonics generating facilities by
specified end-use customers.

Applicable to a case where an end-use customer becomes a

232
specified end-use customer in case of an addition or renewal of
harmonics generating facilities

(2) Calculation of inflow harmonic current


The calculation of inflow of harmonic current from a specified
end-use customer to power systems is as follows.

・ An inflow harmonic current is obtained by adding up the


harmonic currents generated by each harmonics generating
facility operating at its rated output, multiplied by its maximum
rate of operation.
・An inflow harmonic current is the sum of harmonics by their
order.
・Applicable harmonics are less than 40th harmonic.
・If there is a facility that reduces the inflow harmonic current at a
specified end-use customer, its effect can be considered.

(3) Upper limit of inflow of harmonic current


A permissible upper limit of an inflow harmonic current from a
specified end-use customer to power systems means the value of
the permissible upper limit of an inflow harmonic current per 1kW
of contract power shown in attached Table 6-3, multiplied by the
contract power of the specified end-use customer concerned (unit:
kW) for every harmonic.

(4) Measures to control inflow harmonic current


When an inflow harmonic current in Item (2) exceeds the upper
limit of an inflow harmonic current in Item (3), necessary
measures need to be taken in order to keep the inflow below its
upper limit.

1-2. Voltage fluctuation (voltage flicker)


As a voltage fluctuation (voltage flicker) in power systems impedes the
use of electricity by other parties, a standard for voltage fluctuation
must be set.

Those who interconnect demand facilities with power systems need to

233
take necessary measures to maintain the voltage fluctuation ΔV10,
which is the equivalent of a 10Hz fluctuation to which humans are the
most sensitive, within the standard range (the fourth maximum among
1-minute average ΔV10s measured successively for one hour is below
0.45V).

1-3. Maintenance of power factor


When a high voltage capacitor is installed to improve the power factor,
the power factor of generation facilities at the servicing point of end-use
customers in principle needs to be 0.85 or more in lagging power factor.
Further, it should not be a leading power factor when viewed from
power systems in order to prevent the voltage from increasing.

1-4. Others
When other power quality retention measures are required, TDSVIUs
clarify their details and reasons, and establish and make public those
measures.

2. Protective relay system


Protective relay systems required when demand facilities are
interconnected need to be coordinated with those of interconnected
power systems and so forth from the viewpoint of personal and public
safety, power systems security, prevention of damage to electric facilities,
and efficient development of transmission facilities.

As a rule, an over-current relay is installed for an on-site phase fault


and a ground fault relay for an on-site ground fault in principle in order
to prevent a problem at an end-use customer’s site from spreading to
the interconnected systems.

TDSVIUs establish and make public the standard protective relay


systems and the policies for the additional installation of protective
relay systems.

234
Section 10. How to classify property and construction of
generation/demand facilities
Network facilities down to the receiving points connecting the servicing
facilities of VIUs and the electric facilities of power producers are classified
as properties and constructions of VIUs, according to the basic approach for
the classification of property and construction of generation facilities. This
concept also applies to the classification of property and construction of
demand facilities.

From the viewpoint of fairness and transparency, VIUs establish and make
public how to classify in detail the property and construction of overhead
service wires, underground service cables, metering systems, dispatching
data transmission systems, and so forth concerning system interconnections
between generation and demand facilities and network facilities of VIUs.

235
Section 11. Declining an application for system interconnection
VIUs may refuse to accept all or part of applications for system
interconnection under unavoidable circumstances, such as laws and
ordinances, electricity supply and demand situations, situations of servicing
facilities, and payment of charges. In such cases, VIUs explain the reasons to
the applicants.

236
Section 12. Policy on sharing construction costs
VIUs need to make public how to determine the portion of the
construction cost to be paid by an entity interconnected to power
systems according to the following fundamental policies.

VIUs establish and make public how to pay the portion of the
construction cost, based in principle on the rules of the wheeling service
contract in accordance with the provisions of Article 24-3, Paragraph 1
of the Electricity Utilities Industry Law. Fundamental policies are as
follows.

When it is necessary to construct additional network facilities according


to newly-made or newly-increased contract power of wheeling service,
the contractor concerned will in principle pay the amount in excess of
the limit of payment for VIUs (an average cost of facilities covered by
wheeling service charges) from the viewpoint of fairness of burden,
which is called “payment by the causers”.

As for power supply lines, on the other hand, the causers in principle
pay all the cost of construction, considering the certain benefits
specified entities will receive. When several entities use the same power
supply line, in principle the expenses are to be shared in proportion to
the rate of use.

Details and matters other than the above comply with the rules of the
wheeling service contract.

As for the coverage of payment for power supply lines of VIUs, it


complies with the ministerial ordinance “Coverage of payment for power
supply lines”.

237
Section 13. Fundamental policy for modification/withdrawal of
applications
Cases where applicants for system interconnection or TDSVIUs offer to
modify the contracts concluded between these applicants and TDSVIUs
concerning the construction facilities necessary for the system
interconnection for the wheeling service are handled as follows.

1. When an applicant is offering


(1) Publication of work flow
TDSVIUs establish and make public the work flow when the
applicant is offering to modify contracts. A standard work flow is
shown in Attached Paper 6-2.

(2) Modification of contract


a. When applicants wish to modify the contracts, they notify
TDSVIUs without delay.
b. When modifying the rated output power of generation, contract
power, commencement date of wheeling service, and so forth, the
contracts are modified through the publicized work flow.
c. When withdrawing the contracts, the contracts are dissolved
through the publicized work flow.

2. When TDSVIUs are offering


(1) Publication of work flow
TDSVIUs establish and make public the work flow when they are
offering to modify the contents of contracts, such as commencement
date of wheeling service. A standard work flow is shown in
Attached Paper 6-2.

(2) Modification of contract


a. When TDSVIUs wish to modify contracts, they notify the
applicants without delay.
b. TDSVIUs modify contracts through the publicized work flow.

When the work flow concerns the system interconnection of TDSVIUs’


own generation facilities and end-use customers, the above
management approach must be complied with from the viewpoint of

238
fairness and transparency. TDSVIUs establish and make public the
work flow based on Attached Paper 6-2.

They also establish and make public the work flow of modification and
withdrawal of contracts concerning system interconnection of the power
producers other than those mentioned above, depending on the
individual contract of each entity.

239
Attached Paper 6-1 Standard work flowchart from interconnection
examination to commencement of wheeling service

Applicant for interconnection TDSVIU

Application for interconnection Acceptance


examination

Interconnection examination

Acceptance of result of
Reply
interconnection examination

Application for contract(※) Acceptance

Interconnection examination
・Design of system interconnection
construction

Receiving of consent of service Reply (consent of service)

Conclusion of contract(※)

Conclusion of operation agreement and Construction of system


so forth(※) interconnection

Commencement of wheeling service

※ When the applicant for interconnection is a VIU (excluding its


transmission/distribution sector), “application of contract”, “conclusion of
contract” and “conclusion of operation agreement and so forth” refer to
“application for interconnection”, “decision of system interconnection
planning” and “application of in-house rules and so forth concerning system
operation”, respectively.

240
Attached Table 6-1 Information on generation for interconnection
examination
a. Name of power producer, generation site and receiving point
Information on generating
facilities of system
Reason for request Notes
interconnecting power producer,
which TDSVIU requires
For management of
Name of power producer
interconnection examination
To specify the address of
generating site when
Address of generating site
choosing a route to
interconnecting facilities
For examination of
interconnecting facilities
Receiving point
(route of distribution,
interconnection)
For choice of a route to
interconnecting facilities, and
Ground plan, layout of facilities
for examination of facilities
formation

b. Power generation facilities are located outside a franchised area of VIU: contents of a cross-area

wheeling service of electricity contract concluded with a VIU other than the concerned VIU the

wheeling service or contents of an application


Information on generating
facilities of system
Reason for request Notes
interconnecting power producer,
which TDSVIU requires
Contents of cross-area wheeling
service of electricity contracts
For examination of current
concluded with other VIUs

c. Generating system of generating facilities, output of generation, detailed specifications of generator,

specifications of step-up transformer


Information on generating
facilities of system
Reason for request Notes
interconnecting power producer,
which TDSVIU requires

Outline of generating facilities


For comparison with details Submit in as much detail as
(rated output power, number of
of generating facilities possible, for existing facilities
units, type)

To check conformity with Include loaded/ receiving


Single-line diagram
technical requirements facilities

241
Whole of generating facilities
Type of motive power
Submit in as much detail as
(internal combustion, wind Same as above
possible, for existing facilities
power, solar power, etc.)
Type of generator
(synchronous generator, Same as above Same as above
induction generator)
To judge the type of submitted
(Existing or new/ increased) data, according to existing or
new/increased
For examination of phase
Rated voltage
fault current and voltage
Rated capacity Same as above

Rated output For examination of current


For examination of current
Number of units
and phase fault current
To check conformity with
Submit in as much detail as
Power factor (rating) technical requirements and
possible, for existing facilities
for examination of voltage
Power factor (operable
Same as above Same as above
range)
For examination of voltage
Existence of damping coils
fluctuation
To check conformity with Submit in as much detail as
Operable range of frequency
technical requirements possible, for existing facilities
Existence of automatic For examination of voltage
voltage regulator (AVR) fluctuation

Constants of automatic
Same as above
voltage regulator (AVR)
Type of inverter (when an To check conformity with Submit in as much detail as
inverter is used) technical requirements possible, for existing facilities
Point of synchronizing
Same as above
parallel in/off
Saturation characteristic of For examination of phase
a generator fault current
To check conformity with
Existence of automatic technical requirements and
synchronism detector for examination of voltage
fluctuation
Synchronous generator

For examination of phase


Direct-axis transient
fault current and voltage
reactance
fluctuation

Direct-axis sub transient


Same as above
reactance

242
Induction generator
For examination of phase
Locked rotor reactance fault current and voltage
fluctuation

Capacity of current-limiting
reactor Same as above
Step-up transformer

For examination of phase


Rated voltage
fault current and voltage
Rated capacity Same as above
For examination of phase
Leakage impedance (based
fault current and voltage
on rated capacity)
fluctuation
Existence of load tap
changer For examination of voltage
(number of taps, range of and phase fault current
voltage control)

d. Maximum and minimum values of receiving power


Information on generating
facilities of system
Reason for request Notes
interconnecting power producer,
which TDSVIU requires

Maximum and minimum values


For examination of current
of receiving power

e. Voltage at receiving point


Information on generating
facilities of system
Reason for request Notes
interconnecting power producer,
which TDSVIU requires
For choice of voltage class of
interconnecting facilities and
Voltage at receiving point
route to interconnecting
facilities

243
f. Loaded/receiving facilities at power generation site
Information on generating
facilities of system
Reason for request Notes
interconnecting power producer,
which TDSVIU requires
Loaded facilities Special facilities

Total capacity For examination of current

Total power factor For examination of voltage

Existence of harmonics To check harmonics


sources suppression countermeasure
Reference materials on Submit in as much detail as
Same as above
harmonics possible, for existing facilities
Existence of voltage For examination of voltage
fluctuation sources fluctuation
Reference materials on Submit in as much detail as
Same as above
voltage fluctuation possible, for existing facilities
Power receiving transformer

For examination of phase


Rated voltage fault current and voltage

Same as above
Rated capacity

For examination of phase


fault current, voltage
Leakage impedance (based
fluctuation
on rated capacity)

Existence of load tap


changer For examination of voltage
(number of taps, range of and phase fault current
voltage control)
Phase modifying equipment

Unnecessary if phase
For examination of power
Type modifying equipment is
factor
included in total power factor
Capacity on each voltage
class
Same as above Same as above
(extra high voltage, high
voltage, low voltage)

Total capacity Same as above Same as above

To check conformity of
Generator protection
Protective device

protection coordination,
(number of units, type,
protective relaying scheme
cut-off point)
and so forth
Interconnection system
protection
Same as above
(number of units, type,
cut-off point)

244
Prevention of islanding
(number of units, type, Same as above
cut-off point)
Protection of private area
(number of units, type, Same as above
cut-off point)

g. Desired commencement date of wheeling service


Information on generating
facilities of system
Reason for request Notes
interconnecting power producer,
which TDSVIU requires
Desired commencement date of To decide annual conditions
wheeling service for technical examination
Desired commencement date of To check secured term of
operation of interconnecting construction of distribution
facilities system

h. Number of circuits (regular/standby)


Information on generating
facilities of system
Reason for request Notes
interconnecting power producer,
which TDSVIU requires
To decide the number of
Number of circuits
circuits of interconnecting
(regular/standby)
facilities

i. Name and address of applicant


Information on generating
facilities of system
Reason for request Notes
interconnecting power producer,
which TDSVIU requires

For management of result of


Name of applicant
interconnection examination

Name of representative applicant Same as above

Contact address Basic contact details

j. Name of an entity that receives electricity delivered through cross-area wheeling service of electricity,

and a point of delivery


Information on generating
facilities of system
Reason for request Notes
interconnecting power producer,
which TDSVIU requires
Name of an entity that receives
electricity delivered through
For examination of current
cross-area wheeling service of
electricity, and a point of delivery

245
Attached Table 6-2 Information on end-use customer for interconnection
examination
a. Name of end-use customer, location of the use of electricity and service point
Information on facilities of
end-use customer, which TDSVIU Reason for request Notes
requires

For management of
Name of end-use customer
interconnection examination
To specify the address of
location of the use of
Location of the use of electricity electricity when choosing a
route to interconnecting
facilities

For examination of
interconnecting facilities
Service point
(route of distribution,
interconnection)
For choice of a route to
interconnecting facilities, and
Ground plan, layout of facilities
for examination of facilities
formation

b. Contract power
Information on facilities of
end-use customer, which TDSVIU Reason for request Notes
requires

Contract power For examination of current

c. Voltage at servicing point


Information on facilities of
end-use customer, which TDSVIU Reason for request Notes
requires
For choice of voltage class of
interconnecting facilities and
Voltage at servicing point
route to interconnecting
facilities

d. Loaded/receiving facilities at location of the use of electricity


Information on facilities of end-use
Reason for request Notes
customer, which TDSVIU requires
・Include protective relay
To check conformity with
Single-line diagram ・Include generating facilities,
technical requirements
if any

246
Loaded facilities
Total capacity
For examination of current

Total power factor


For examination of voltage
Special facilities

Existence of harmonics
To check harmonics
sources
suppression countermeasure

Reference materials on Submit in as much detail as


Same as above
harmonics possible, for existing facilities

Existence of voltage
For examination of voltage
fluctuation sources
fluctuation

Reference materials on Submit in as much detail as


Same as above
voltage fluctuation possible, for existing facilities
Power receiving transformer

For examination of phase


Rated voltage fault current and voltage

Rated capacity Same as above

For examination of phase


Leakage impedance (based on fault current and voltage
rated capacity) fluctuation
Phase modifying equipment

Unnecessary if phase
For examination of power
Type modifying equipment is
factor
included in total power factor
Capacity on each voltage class
(extra high voltage, high Same as above Same as above
voltage, low voltage)

Total capacity
Same as above Same as above

247
To check conformity of
Generator protection
Protective relay system
protection coordination, Submit if there are existing
(number of units, type, cut-off
protective relay system and so generating facilities
point)
forth
Interconnection system
protection
Same as above
(number of units, type, cut-off
point)
Prevention of islanding
Submit if there are existing
(number of units, type, cut-off Same as above
generating facilities
point)
Protection of private area
(number of units, type, cut-off Same as above
point)

e. Desired commencement date of wheeling service

Information on facilities of
end-use customer, which TDSVIU Reason for request Notes
requires
Desired commencement date of To decide annual conditions
wheeling service for technical examination
Desired commencement date of To check secured term of
operation of interconnecting construction of transmission
facilities and distribution system

f. Number of circuits (regular/standby)


Information on facilities of
end-use customer, which TDSVIU Reason for request Notes
requires
To decide the number of
Number of circuits
circuits of interconnecting
(regular/standby)
facilities

g. Name and address of applicant


Information on facilities of
end-use customer, which TDSVIU Reason for request Notes
requires

For management of result of


Name of applicant
interconnection examination

Name of representative applicant Same as above

Contact address Basic contact details

248
h. Generating system of generating facilities, output of generation, detailed specifications of generator,

specifications of step-up transformer


Information on facilities of end-use
Reason for request Notes
customer, which TDSVIU requires
Outline of generating facilities Submit in as much detail as
For comparison with details
(rated output power, number of possible, for existing facilities
of generating facilities
units, type)
Whole of generating facilities

Type of motive power


To check conformity with Submit in as much detail as
(internal combustion engine,
technical requirements possible, for existing facilities
wind power, solar power, etc.)
Type of generator
(synchronous generator, Same as above Same as above
induction generator)
To judge the type of
(Existing or new/ increased) submitted data, according to
existing or new/increased
For examination of phase
Rated voltage
fault current and voltage
Rated capacity Same as above

Rated output power For examination of current


For examination of power
Number of units
flow and phase fault current
To check conformity with
Submit in as much detail as
Power factor (rating) technical requirements and
possible, for existing facilities
for examination of voltage

Power factor (operable range) Same as above Same as above

For examination of voltage


Existence of damping coils
fluctuation
To check conformity with Submit in as much detail as
Operable range of frequency
technical requirements possible, for existing facilities
Existence of automatic For examination of voltage
voltage regulator (AVR) fluctuation
Constants of automatic
Same as above
voltage regulator (AVR)
To check conformity with Submit in as much detail as
Type of inverter (if adopted)
technical requirements possible, for existing facilities

Point of synchronizing
Same as above
parallel in/off

Saturation characteristic of For examination of phase


generator fault current
To check conformity with
Existence of automatic technical requirements and
synchronism detector for examination of voltage
fluctuation

249
Synchronous generator
For examination of phase
Direct-axis transient
fault current and voltage
reactance
fluctuation

Direct-axis sub transient


reactance Same as above

For examination of phase


Induction generator

Locked rotor reactance


fault current and voltage
fluctuation

Capacity of current-limiting
reactor Same as above

For examination of
Rated voltage
Step-up transformer

phase/ground fault current


and voltage

Rated capacity Same as above

For examination of
Leakage impedance (based phase/ground fault current,
on rated capacity) voltage fluctuation and
protective relaying scheme
Existence of load tap changer
For examination of voltage
(number of taps, range of
and phase fault current
voltage control)

250
Attached Table 6-3 Maximum harmonic current per 1kW of contract
power

(mA/kW)
Receiving 5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd Over
voltage 23rd
6.6kV 3.5 2.5 1.6 1.3 1.0 0.9 0.76 0.70

251
Attached Paper 6-2 Work flow for modification/withdrawal of application

[Work flow when applicant for interconnection modifies the application]


Applicant for interconnection TDSVIU

Application for modification Acceptance

Examination based on the application


・Feasibility
・ Necessity of modification of
construction
・Construction cost and so forth

Receiving Reply

※ Application for
modification of contract Acceptance

※Renewal of contract

[Work flow when applicant for interconnection withdraws the application]


Applicant for interconnection TDSVIU

Application for withdrawing Acceptance

Examination based on the application


・Management of existing facilities and
so forth
・Construction cost and so forth

Receiving Reply

※ Application for Acceptance


cancellation of contract

※Cancellation of contract

252
[Work flow when TDSVIU modifies the application]
Applicant for interconnection TDSVIU

Occurrence of factors of modification

Examination based on occurrence of


factors of modification
・ Necessity of modification of the
application
・Contents of the modification
・ Necessity of modification of the
contract and so forth

Receiving ※ Application for modification


of contract

※Renewal of contract

If the applicant for interconnection is a VIU (other than its


transmission/distribution sector), “contract” refers to “Decision on planning”
and so on.

253
Chapter 7. Rules of power system operation (high voltage)
Section 1. Policy for power system operation
DSVIUs establish the fundamental policy for their own power system
operation and secure a stable operation of distribution systems.

This section applies to the system operations conducted by DSVIUs.

1. System operation under normal conditions


1-1. Power system operation under normal conditions
DSVIUs determine the operational system configuration in order to
maintain system security as well as conduct system switching smoothly.
When power flows exceed or are assumed to exceed the operating
capacity of distribution facilities by monitoring electric current and
others, TSVIUs take necessary measures and strive to achieve the
stable operation of the distribution systems.

1-2. Operational system configuration


DSVIUs establish and make public the fundamental policy for the items
described below concerning the operational system configuration under
normal conditions after taking into account Item (1)“ Fundamental item
of operational system configuration”.

(1) Fundamental item of operational system configuration


Power systems are configured considering maintenance of system
voltage/security and smooth switching with/without system
contingency.

1-3. System monitoring and control of power flow


DSVIUs establish and make public the policy for system monitoring and
control of power flows after taking into account Item “(1) System
monitoring” and “(2) Control of power flow”.

(1) System monitoring


DSVIUs always monitor the system conditions, such as operations
of distribution facilities, system voltage, power flows by means of
system monitoring devices, information from the entities
concerned, and so forth in order to achieve appropriate and smooth

254
power system operation, prevent contingencies, and maintain
power quality.

(2) Control of power flow


DSVIUs control power flows to properly operate distribution
facilities, taking into account facility and system security. When
power flows exceed or are assumed to exceed the operating capacity
of distribution facilities, they control them within the operating
capacity by means of network switching of distribution facilities.
When power flows exceed or are assumed to exceed the operating
capacity of distribution facilities even after network switching of
distribution facilities or because of scheduled outage of distribution
facilities, DSVIUs request power producers to parallel out or stop
the generators according to the operation agreements and so forth.

2. Operation under abnormal conditions


2-1. Advance procedure for abnormal condition
If there are concerns over the likelihood of adverse contingencies in the
distribution systems, DSVIUs and the entities concerned strive to
prevent them from occurring and their spreading by preparing for such
contingencies.

DSVIUs establish and make public the policy for preventing the
occurrence or spread of contingencies, taking into account the following
Items (1)“ Communication” and (2) “ Advance procedure”.

(1) Communication
DSVIUs strive to collect information on such events as lightning,
earthquake, strong wind, typhoon, heavy rain, heavy snow, tsunami,
freshet, fire, and salt contamination, take necessary measures and
quickly inform the entities that might be affected by Item (2)“ Advance
procedure”, of the contents of the measures without delay through the
fixed chain of communication.

In the following cases, the entities concerned quickly provide


information about the situation through the chain of communication
determined by DSVIUs:

255
・It is conceived that contingencies may occur in power systems.
・It is assumed that contingencies affecting power quality may occur
due to the difficulty in maintaining the normal operation of power
facilities.

(2) Advance procedure


If there are concerns that adverse contingencies such as salt
contamination, lightning, and accumulated snow may occur in the
power systems, DSVIUs strive to prevent them from occurring and
spreading, paying attention to the weather conditions in each area
and contacting the entities concerned, by taking the following
actions in advance if necessary:

・Secure communication channels with the entities concerned


・ Arrangement with the entities concerned for contingency
measures for communication breakdown and equipment
problems
・Cancellation of scheduled outage

The entities concerned can shut down the power facilities without
notifying the DSVIUs if there is a risk that personal and public
safety or power facilities might be seriously disrupted or damaged
because of electric shocks, explosion, fire, flooding or other causes.
They are obligated to report this fact to DSVIUs as soon as the
power facilities concerned are shut down.

2-2. Procedure for contingency


In case of contingencies in power systems, DSVIUs and the entities
concerned grasp the state of contingencies exactly and restore the power
systems safely and swiftly, taking into account personal safety and the
security of power facilities and measures to reduce generation and
supply outage.

In an emergency, DSVIUs stop the operation of the distribution systems


concerned to maintain their security.

256
After the problem is cleared, DSVIUs explain the load dispatching
instructions conducted to the power producers and end-use customers
concerned.

DSVIUs establish and make public the policy for restoration from
contingencies taking into account the following Items (1)“ Grasping the
state of abnormal conditions” and (2)“ Fundamental policy for
restoration system switching”.

(1) Understanding of abnormal conditions


DSVIUs judge whether the urgent procedures are necessary or not
without delay by grasping the state of contingencies as follows in
power systems:

・DSVIUs grasp the state of contingencies accurately by means of


system monitoring devices, protective relay operations, and
reports from the entities concerned in the event of contingencies
in power systems.
・When abnormal conditions, such as large fluctuations in power
flows and system voltages in power systems, are detected or
reported, DSVIUs investigate their causes immediately.

(2) Fundamental policy for restoration system switching


DSVIUs restore the power systems from contingencies through
system switching according to the following policies:

a. Prior to system restoration, urgent procedures are taken


considering the following:
・Securing of personal safety
・Securing of facility maintenance
・Prevention of outage from spreading
・Restoration from abnormal voltage

b. Immediately after the urgent procedures are taken, the power


systems are to be restored to the pre-contingency state by the
following measures:
・Automatic restoration by automatic reclosing protection and so on

257
・ Restoration switching operation under load dispatching
instructions

c. After restoration switching operation, the following measures


are taken:
・Switching operation to relieve overloaded facilities caused by
demand network switching and so on
・Operation to adjust the system voltage if it has deviated from the
target level
・System operation to restore system security after restoration from
contingencies

(3) Stopping distribution facilities during switching operation for


restoration
During the restoration switching operation, DSVIUs stop
operating the distribution systems in the following cases:

・When the operating capacity of distribution facilities is exceeded


・ When it is necessary to stop distribution facilities in an
emergency for personal safety and security of facilities

DSVIUs may also stop operating the power facilities without


notifying power producers or end-use customers in an emergency,
and are responsible for explaining the action to power producers
and end-use customers concerned.

Detailed procedures are as follows.


a. When the operating capacity of distribution facilities is exceeded
<Policy>
If power flows exceed or are assumed to exceed their operating
capacities because of the measures taken to deal with abnormal
conditions, such as forced outages of generation and distribution
facilities or similar problems, and yet the network switching fails
to clear the problems, DSVIUs stop operating the distribution
facilities if necessary.

b. Necessity for urgently stopping distribution facilities for

258
personal safety and security of facilities (Abnormal condition
equivalent to fault)
<Policy>
If it is necessary to stop operating the distribution facilities in an
emergency for personal safety and security of facilities, DSVIUs
conduct network switching or stop operating the distribution
facilities.

2-3. Procedure in case of scarce supply


In case of tight supply and demand balance, TSVIUs operate according
to Items (1) and (2) of Paragraph 2-3 of Section 1 of Chapter 4
“Procedure in case of scarce supply”. In this regard, DSVIUs do not
operate independently. If TSVIUs conduct demand control or load
shedding, distribution systems subordinate to transmission systems
may also be affected by outages and other problems.

(1) Post-explanation
After the supply and demand balance is restored, TSVIUs explain
the load dispatching instructions given to power producers and
end-use customers concerned.

259
Section 2. Securing of regulating capability necessary for maintaining
power quality
1. Regulating system frequency under normal conditions
TSVIUs regulate the system frequency of all the power systems
including distribution systems under normal conditions according to
Paragraph 1 of Section 2 of Chapter 4 “Regulating system frequency
under normal conditions”.

2. Regulating system frequency under abnormal conditions


If the system frequency goes up or down significantly due to generation
outage, rapid demand change, or system contingencies, or if the
maintenance of system frequency continues or is likely to continue to be
difficult, the system frequency is adjusted by TSVIUs according to
Paragraph 2 of Section 2 of Chapter 4 “Regulating system frequency
control under abnormal conditions”.
In such a case, DSVIUs do not operate independently. If TSVIUs
conduct demand control or load shedding, distribution systems
subordinate to transmission systems may also be affected by outages
and other problems.

3. Reactive power voltage control under normal conditions


3-1. Fundamental policy for reactive power voltage control under
normal conditions
(1) Fundamental policy
DSVIUs strive to maintain the system voltages at proper levels.

(2) Regulation means


DSVIUs strive to control the system voltages at proper levels, not
only by monitoring them, but also by anticipating ever-changing
loads. Detailed voltage regulation methods are as follows:

・Request for controlling on-load tap changer of main transformer


at substation
・Control of line voltage regulation
・Change of system configuration

Power producers control the voltage of generators in order to

260
maintain the system voltages at proper levels.

(3) Request for cooperation


DSVIUs request end-use customers to shut off the power capacitors
to improve the power factor if necessary to regulate the system
voltage when the load is light, such as across the New Year, during
the holiday period from late April and early May, at night time, and
on holidays.

3-2. Publication of rules of DSVIUs


DSVIUs establish and make public the policy for reactive power voltage
control under normal conditions according to the fundamental policy of
this paragraph.

4. Control of reactive power voltage under abnormal conditions


When a system voltage drops or is assumed to drop abnormally due to
the contingencies of generation and transmission facilities or greater
demand, TSVIUs take measures according to Paragraph 4 of Section 2
of Chapter 4 “Control of reactive power voltage under abnormal
conditions”. In this regard, DSVIUs do not operate independently. If
TSVIUs conduct demand control or load shedding, distribution systems
subordinate to transmission systems may also be affected by outages
and other problems.

261
Section 3. Generation schedule
This section determines the procedures for the submission of schedules,
specifications, and data from PPSs necessary for a supply- demand
control schedule made by TSVIUs and for the publication of
supply-and-demand balance in order to operate the power systems
stably and in a fair manner within their own control areas.

PPSs are subject to these procedures for submission.

1. Submission of schedule
PPSs submit supply-and-demand plans, generation schedules, and the
outage schedule of generation facilities necessary for every time span of
planning as listed below to a place determined by TSVIUs where
submission is accepted (hereinafter referred to as “PSA”).

(1) Supply and demand plans


PPSs make a supply-and-demand plan for each control area where
their demand exists and submit it to PSAs of the control area
where their demand exists according to Table 7-3-1.

(2) Generation schedule and outage schedule of generation facilities


PPSs make a generation schedule by power station and an outage
schedule of generation facilities for every control area where their
demand exists and submit it to the PSA of the control area with
generation facilities according to Table 7-3-2.

PSAs can request PPSs to submit the specifications for planning


and additional data other than the items determined in Table 7-3-2
“Table of submission of generation schedule and outage schedule of
generation facilities” for distribution system operations after
explaining its necessity.

2. Change of schedule
When PPSs change their supply and demand plans and generation
schedule in a manner that influences the system security management
of DSVIUs or change them because of forced or scheduled outages of
distribution facilities of VIUs and other problems that affect system

262
security in the control area, PPSs will implement the following
procedures.

If this change causes modifications of SPFISF, the procedures for this


change are subject to Section 10 of Chapter 4 “Rules for use of ISF”.

(1) Change in supply and demand plans


Of their own supply and demand plans submitted in accordance
with Paragraph 1 “Submission of schedule”, PPSs submit without
delay those for modification from Table 7-3-1 to the PSA of the
control area where their demand exists.

(2) Change in generation schedule and outage schedule of generation


facilities
PPSs submit without delay the items to be modified from Table
7-3-2 concerning their own generation schedule and outage
schedule of generation facilities that have been submitted in
accordance with Paragraph 1 “Submission of schedule” to every
PSA of the control area where their generation exists.

263
Table 7-3-1 Submission of supply and demand plan

Short-term schedule

Submitted sc Annual schedule Monthly schedule Weekly schedule Schedule for the
hedule (the first to seco (next month, the (next week, the w next day

nd year) month after next) eek after next)

Last day of First day of month Every Tuesday Every noon

Deadline October on an on a monthly basis

annual basis

Maximum/minim Maximum/minimu Maximum/minimu Energy (kWh) eve


m power (kW) and
Forecasted um power (kW) m power (kW) by its time on a daily ry 30 minutes
basis
value of by weekday/holiday

demand weekday/holiday on a weekly basis

(*1) on a monthly

basis

Supply for fo Total of planned value of procured supply

recasted dem
Planned value of supply not procured yet ─────
and

(*1)

(*1) Forecasted demand basically means the total of demand in a control area, but

TSVIUs can request PPSs to submit their demand by servicing point when incidents

such as scheduled outages require coordination among the entities concerned.

As for supply and demand plans, other time spans can be requested, if necessary, for

determining ATCs of interconnections or depending upon the supply and demand

situation.

264
Table 7-3-2 Submission of generation schedule and outage schedule of
generation facilities

Short-term schedule
Submitted Annual Monthly schedule Weekly schedule Schedule for the
schedule schedule (next month, the (next week, the week next day
(the first to month after next) after next)
second year)
Last day of First day of month on Every Tuesday Every noon
Deadline October on an a monthly basis
annual basis
Generation Maximum/mini Maximum/minimum Maximum/minimum Energy (kWh)
schedule by mum power power (kW) by power (kW) and its every 30 minutes
power station (kW) by weekday/holiday on a time on a daily basis (*4)
(*2) weekday/holida weekly basis (*3)
y on a monthly
basis
Data of start/end of work, details of ― ―
Outage work, and other necessary items
schedule of Scheduled outage
generation ― ― more than original ―
facilities one
(*5) Modification of
scheduled outage
(*2) Figures in the schedule are net output and the name of a control area with

generation facilities is also entered.

(*3) TSVIUs can request PPSs to submit other time spans of schedules depending upon

operational situations in the control area.

(*4) TSVIUs obtain the value of the schedules incorporating the transactions of the

day-ahead market from the entities operating a power exchange.

(*5) This includes an outage schedule of generation facilities and tasks accompanied by

output control. The scale of generation facilities and the outage period, for which

submission of a scheduled outage is required, are determined by the rules of VIUs.

265
Section 4. Coordination of scheduled outage
Scheduled outages are essential for the inspection and repair of
facilities, carried out depending on inspection intervals and conditions
in order to make sure that the power facilities comply with the technical
standards established by laws and ordinances, and security regulations
of each company and to maintain system security by preventing failures
in the facilities.

This section determines the basic policy for smoothly and securely
coordinating the scheduled outages of the distribution and generation
facilities within the control areas of DSVIUs.

1. Scheduled outages to be coordinated


(1) Scheduled outages to be coordinated by DSVIUs
DSVIUs establish the rules of coordination for the scheduled
outages of the power facilities operated by all the interconnected
LSEs, power producers, and end-use customers. The rules cover
system operations related to the following.

・Scheduled outages of:


- Generation (stoppage, restriction of power generation)
- Current transformer for power transaction
- Distribution line
- Electronic communication equipment that interrupts
information necessary for supervision, control, protection and so
forth with an impact on power system operation
・Facilities influencing power systems operation except for those
mentioned above

2. Fundamental items for scheduled outage coordination


・ The items shown in Table 7-4-1 are considered when DSVIUs
coordinate the area, date, and period of outage concerning distribution
facilities within control areas and generation facilities and make plans
for outage schedules.

・DSVIUs establish the rules for coordinating the scheduled outages


concerning distribution facilities within control areas, and generation

266
facilities (hereinafter referred to as “The rules of VIUs”).

The following items are established in the rules of VIUs:

・Facilities subject to coordinated scheduled outage by DSVIUs


・Items to be considered in coordinating scheduled outages
・Process of coordinating scheduled outages among the entities and
those concerned

Table 7-4-1 Items to be considered when coordinating scheduled


outages

Item Detail

Securing of facility and Maintenance and inspection period of power facility, conditions

personal safety of works, personal and public safety

System security Maintenance of appropriate system voltage, degree of influence

due to contingency of facility and countermeasures, time

required for emergency restoration, season to avoid scheduled

outage such as that of heavy load and that of high risk of facility

fault due to lightning, snow, and typhoon

Degree of influence on Generation schedule, operating schedule, and scheduled outage

electric power industry planning of each electric power industry and end-use customers

Rationality Coordination of scheduled outage with distribution facilities

within distribution area, and generation

Others Necessity of scheduled outage, details of work such as period and

method, securing of workers

・When coordinating the work stop area and the timing and period of
outage, DSVIUs in principle give priority to securing of facility and
personal safety and system security on condition that the stable
operation of power systems is secured. However the order of priority
may be different from the above because they take all the
continuously-changing situations of power systems, urgency of work,
and so forth into account and coordinate the order of priority.

・DSVIUs are obligated to explain the coordinating process to those

267
subject to coordination.

・DSVIUs and the entities concerned coordinate in advance the plans of


scheduled outages in good faith.

3. Work sharing of scheduled outage coordination


・DSVIUs establish and make public the rules of VIUs and make plans
for and determine the scheduled outage plans through coordination
with the entities concerned on the basis of their applications for
scheduled outages.

・If the scheduled outage plans need to be modified or extra outages


have to be added to them inevitably, DSVIUs coordinate their details
in accordance with Table 7-4-1.

4. Category of scheduled outages and its planning


Types of scheduled outages and their plans are shown in Table 7-4-2.

DSVIUs strive to implement the scheduled outages in a way as to


facilitate the smooth coordination of scheduled outages.

Table 7-4-2 Category of scheduled outages and its planning

Category Details

Scheduled outage Scheduled outage planned systematically

Modified or added scheduled outage


Scheduled outage added or modified

5. Coordination of scheduled outage planning


(1) Coordinating procedure by VIUs
DSVIUs establish and make public the coordinating procedures in
the rules of VIUs as these procedures vary depending upon a scale
of power systems and institutional forms.

268
6. Coordination of modification and addition of scheduled outages after
decision of the scheduled outage plan
・When the scheduled outage plans need to be modified due to changes
in the conditions of supply and demand balance and power systems
and others, or due to inevitably or unexpected accidents or facilities
require additional scheduled outages, DSVIUs coordinate their
modifications and the details of their additions each time according to
the rules of VIUs. When urgent outages to ensure personal safety and
security of facilities are necessary, the above coordination can be
omitted if DSVIUs so determine.

7. Publication of decision and status of scheduled outages


・DSVIUs decide on the scheduled outages of the distribution facilities
and generation facilities according to the rules of VIUs, and notify
end-use customers and power producers of their decision.

269
Section 5 Policy for load dispatching instructions
This section establishes the fundamental policy for the load dispatching
instructions from DSVIUs to the operators concerned of DSVIUs and
those who interconnect the power systems in order to maintain power
quality, supply end-use customers with stable electricity, and secure
safety.

Load dispatching instructions include the automatic control of


operation and switching of power facilities directly from computers and
automatic restoration devices, not through human operation. This
section applies to the load dispatching instructions of DSVIUs.

1. Coverage
In principle, DSVIUs establish and make public the applicable scope of
load dispatching instructions of DSVIUs according to the following
items:

・Operation and switching of the power facilities shown in Table 7-5-1


concerning system operation within the control areas of DSVIUs
・Load dispatching instructions of cancellation of work to maintain
system security to deal with weather conditions, system contingencies,
and so on
・A load dispatching instruction to PPSs in the event of an unnegligible
influence on supply-demand control and system operation within
control areas such as frequent inferior performances of load following
of PPSs during peak demand in the summer and so on.

However, if urgent actions are required due to the risk of serious injury
or loss of human life, faults or their spreading, they may be taken
independent of the load dispatching instructions.

The conditions, subjects, and details of load dispatching instructions are


determined in Section 1 “Policy for power system operation” and
Section 2 “Securing for regulating capability necessary for maintaining
power quality”.

270
Table 7-5-1 Examples of operation and switching of power facilities by
load dispatching instructions and so on

Item Example

(a) Generator Start/stop

(b) Distribution line Start/stop

(c) Switching in/out Switching on/off concerning the above (a) – (b)

(d) Grounding Grounding (*1) and ungrounding

(e) Protective relay, system control


Locking/unlocking of device
device

Operation/switching deemed especially necessary for


(f) Others
load dispatching

(*1) Excluding grounding by workers

2. Scope and system of load dispatching instruction


・DSVIUs establish and make public their own scopes and chains of load
dispatching instructions as shown in Table 7-5-2 to give their
instructions effectively and appropriately on the basis of Paragraph 1
“Coverage”.

Table 7-5-2 Typical example of scope of load dispatching instructions

Load dispatching center Scope of load dispatching instructions

Distribution sector Entire distribution system

・ DSVIUs determine the scope and chain of load dispatching


instructions with other entities after mutual confirmation based on
operation agreements and so forth.

・The details of operation agreements need to comply with the Rules;


typical items are shown in Table 7-5-3. Items reflecting the
operational constraints of each power producer are also determined
based on the operation agreements and so forth.

271
Table 7-5-3 Typical items of operation agreements

Entities concluding
operation agreement Item Details
with VIUs
Load Chain of load dispatching instructions
PPS dispatching
instruction
Schedule Notification and coordination of supply and
demand schedule (including use of
interconnection)
Information Information system and submission of record
system
Others Operational constraints and cooperation of load
dispatching control
Load Subject facility, scope, and chain of load
dispatching dispatching instruction
Power producer instruction
Operation and switching of concerned facilities
Operation
and procedure in case of contingency
Information Information system and submission of record
system
work Items concerning scheduled outage
Others Operational constraints and cooperation of load
dispatching control

3. Submission and reception of load dispatching instructions


3-1. Fundamental policy
Load dispatching instructions must be prompt, clear, and accurate in
order to supply end-use customers with stable electricity as well as
maintain security, and those who receive them must not reject, postpone
or modify the instructions. However, if complying with the load
dispatching instructions would threaten personal safety or the security
of facilities, or depending on the operational conditions of facilities,
these load dispatching instructions can be cancelled or modified upon
request (reasons for the request must be attached).

3-2. Fundamental items


(1) Load dispatching instructions are given using the terms for
instructions (*2) determined and made public by DSVIUs.

(2) DSVIUs prepare operational procedures in advance when

272
operating the facilities in accordance with the load dispatching
instructions under normal conditions. When preparing these
operational procedures, DSVIUs discuss with the entities
concerned the reasons, category, procedures (the switching
procedure if necessary), its switching time and measures for safety,
including necessary items in the operational procedures paper.

(3) Operating facilities based on load dispatching instructions under


normal conditions are subject to the procedures prepared according
to Item (2).

(4) If it is possible to operate facilities securely and precisely without


the operational procedures, such as stopping the generator, or if
there is not sufficient time in the event of contingencies, the
operational procedures for operating facilities by the load
dispatching instructions can be omitted.

(*2) The terms for instructions have been determined by each


DSVIU until now and they differ from one control area to
another. ESCJ will not try to unify these terms because such
unification without careful planning would cause confusion
and lead to failures.

3-3. Submission and reception of load dispatching instructions


Submission and reception of load dispatching instructions are to be
conducted promptly, clearly, and accurately as follows.

(1) Load dispatching instructions are given and received through a


chain of load dispatching instructions.

(2) Persons let each other know their names when giving and receiving
load dispatching instructions.

(3) Persons who give load dispatching instructions clarify the details.

(4) Persons who receive load dispatching instructions comprehend the


purpose and details, and repeat them.

273
(5) Persons who give or receive load dispatching instructions mutually
record the purpose and details with each other and clarify their
responsibilities.

(6) Persons who receive load dispatching instructions complete their


operations promptly and then immediately report the results to the
persons who gave the load dispatching instructions.

274
Chapter 8 Rules of information publication
Section 1 Information publication
This section determines fundamental policies concerning the
publication of useful information on using power systems (hereinafter
referred to as “information”) by ESCJ, TDSVIUs and transmission
sectors of WEUs (hereinafter referred to as “TDS”) so as to ensure
fairness and transparency for all the entities and the end-use customers
who use the power systems.

1. Fundamental policy
ESCJ and TDS make public accurate information and comply with any
requests for information publication faithfully based on the principle of
ensuring fairness and transparency.

2. Scope
This section is applicable to information publication by ESCJ and TDS.

3. Information publicized by ESCJ


(1) ESCJ makes public its decisions on or changes in the information
shown in attached Table 8-1 without delay in accordance with
Paragraph 1 “Fundamental policy”. ESCJ also posts or discloses
the fact that decisions or modifications were made in the
information.

(2) ESCJ also makes public the information other than that in
attached Table 8-1 to ensure fairness and transparency of ESCJ
and TDS.

(3) ESCJ pays adequate attention to the protection of information


stipulated in Paragraph 7 “Protection of information”, when ESCJ
makes it public.

(4) ESCJ determines the details of the information, especially the


timing and means of submission, submitted by TDS to ESCJ.

(5) If ESCJ cannot respond to individual requests for information


disclosure, it explains its reason.

275
4. Means of information publication by ESCJ
(1) How information can be publicized by ESCJ is shown in attached
Table 8-1 according to the details of the information.

(2) ESCJ determines an alternative method of information disclosure


during periodic maintenance, failures and so forth of the system for
publicizing of system information.

5. Objects for information publication by ESCJ


Those who receive information publicized by ESCJ are shown in
attached Table 8-1 depending on the details of the information.

6. Information which TDS publicize


(1) TDS must establish and make public the rules of information
publication concerning the use of power systems (hereinafter
referred to as “rules of information publication by TDS”) in
compliance with this section.

(2) The following items must be provided in the rules of information


publication by TDS:

a. Information items to be publicized and their


method/subject/time. Information items to be publicized by TDS
are shown in attached Table 8-2.
b. Policy for information to be protected and examples

(3) TDS must establish and make public the rules of system
development, system interconnection including wheeling service,
and system operation, coordinating the rules established and made
public by ESCJ.

(4) TDS is obligated to strive to publicize its own rules that include
items other than those provided in the rules on the basis of
Paragraph 1 “Fundamental policy”.

(5) When TDS decides on or modifies the rules of information

276
publicized by TDS and the rules to be publicized according to Items
(3) and (4), it makes them public without delay. TDS also posts or
discloses the fact that decisions or modifications were made in the
information.

(6) TDS pays adequate attention to the protection of information


stipulated in Paragraph 7 “Protection of information” when it
makes the information public.

(7) If TDS cannot respond to individual requests for information


disclosure, it explains the reason.

7. Protection of information
(1) ESCJ and TDS do not make public the information shown in
Paragraph 1 of Attached Paper 8-1 and 8-2 “Third-party
information, and information not to be publicized for security
reasons”.

(2) When TDS is requested to make public the information stipulated


in Paragraph 2 of Attached Paper 8-1 and 8-2 “Of information
items used in power systems, those that require attention to
security”, by an entity who is considering system interconnection,
in principle it shows the information it owns to the concerned party
while paying close attention to its security.

The following measures are taken to maintain the security of the


information if it is especially important. Policies and examples of
especially important information are determined in the rules of
information publicized by TDS based on Item (2)-b of Paragraph 6
“Information which TDS publicize”.

・Advance registration of visitors


・Clarification of reasons for requesting information
・Agreement on confidentiality
・Other required procedures

277
Section 2 Disclosure of ATC and so forth of ISF
This section determines how to provide the information of ATC of ISF
and so forth for UIs, in order for UIs to improve their convenience and
outlook for the business’s development of ISF.

1. Important notice
An entity that has received the information pays careful attention to the
following concerning the provided information.

・ATC and other data to be disclosed do not guarantee the capacity


registration being applied for or added because a certain time
difference occurs between their application and the renewal of ATC
and other data.

2. Scope
This section is applicable to ISF stipulated in Section 7 of Chapter 4
“Definitions of ISF”.

3. Specification of STLCA
3-1. Collection of information required for specification
Whenever the wheeling service using trunk transmission systems
within the control areas of VIUs is rejected or stopped, TSVIUs report
the names of the transmission facilities and duration of stoppage, and
reason to ESCJ.

3-2. Specification of STLCA


ESCJ specifies STLCA without delay according to the definition in
Paragraph 1-3 of Section 7 of Chapter 4 “STLCA”.

3-3. Disclosure of ISF


ESCJ discloses the names of STLCAs, their specified periods, and the
simplified power system diagram immediately after specifying the
STLCAs.

If the specified period is to be extended as a result of new rejection or


cancel of the wheeling service subject to the accumulation of the STLCA
during the specified period, ESCJ also discloses the new specified

278
period.

4. Disclosure of ATC and so forth of interconnections


4-1. Items to disclose
Items to disclose are “ATC”, “operating capacity”, “margin”, “planned
power flow (total)”, “superposed power flow” (hereinafter referred to as
“ATCSF”) and the factors used to calculate “operating capacity”
(thermal capacity, stability, voltage stability or frequency maintenance)
of interconnections.

For a long-term, yearly, and monthly time period, the operating capacity
of interconnections is calculated assuming normal conditions of the
power systems during the period of disclosure. When the operating
capacity of interconnections decreases due to scheduled outages and so
forth over yearly and monthly periods, ESCJ discloses the names of the
interconnections, ATCSF after the reduction of operating capacity, and
reasons for their reductions. If operating capacity reductions occur
throughout the periods of the minimum unit of each disclosed time
spans of the scheduled outage planning, the value of ATCSF after the
operating capacity reduction is disclosed instead of that of ATCSF under
normal conditions.

4-2. Period/time-span/time of disclosure


The period/time-span/time of disclosure are shown in Table 8-2-1.

279
Table 8-2-1 Period/time-span/time of disclosure
Period Time span (*1) Time of disclosure (*2)
(a) Long-term From 3-10 years The peak time of demand under At 5:00 pm on March 31
normal conditions of power systems every year
every fiscal year
(If ATC in the other time spans are
expected to be smaller than that in
the peak time, ATCSF at the time
spans also can be disclosed.)
(b) Year From 3 months to 2 Every daytime and nighttime, on At 5:00 pm on March 15
years weekdays and holidays each month every year
(c) Month From 3 weeks to 2 Every daytime and nighttime, on At 5:00 pm on 20th
months weekdays and holidays each week every month
(d) Week From 3 days to 2 Every 30 minutes At 5:00 pm every
weeks Thursday
(e) The day after From the following Every 30 minutes At 3:00 pm on the
the following day day to the day after business day before an
the following day actual transaction
(f) The following From the day to the Every 30 minutes At 5:00 pm on the day
day following day before an actual
transaction

(*1) Weekdays and holidays in the column of “Time span” comply with Paragraph 3 of Section 10

of Chapter 4 “Judging wheeling availability and registering/confirming capacity”.

(*2) The timing of disclosure is as follows.


・As for the values of ATCSF that are disclosed overlapping others on the same transaction

day or during the same period, the latest disclosed information is regarded as correct.
・If the disclosure day of Item (a), (b) or (c) falls on VIUs’ holiday, it will be the business day

immediately before those holidays.


・If ATCSF are disclosed either for (d) or (e), it is unnecessary to disclose data for the other.

However, even if the data are already disclosed in (d), the data will be disclosed when

ATCSF is modified based on the policy stipulated in Section 9 of Chapter 4 “ATC of ISF”.

4-3. Time to renew


ATCSF to be disclosed is to be renewed without delay in the event of the
following:

・Changes in the operating capacity of the concerned transmission


facilities because of system constraints, such as system stability,
voltage stability, maintenance of system frequency and so forth
・Modification of the planned power flow
・Modification of the margin

4-4. Method of disclosure


ATCSF is disclosed through the system for publicizing of system
information.

280
4-5. Subjects for disclosure
The subjects for disclosure are those who have registered for the system
for publicizing of system information.

5. Disclosure of ATCSF of STLCA


5-1. Items to disclose
Items to disclose are stipulated in Paragraph 4-1 “Items to disclose”.

5-2. Period/time span/time of disclosure


The period/time span/time of disclosure are stipulated in Paragraph 4-2
“Period/time-span/time of disclosure”. However, the data of the 2nd
fiscal year (from 1 to 2 years ahead) of long-term and annual plans are
excluded.

The information of ATCSF of STLCA is provided in the order of the next


day, one week, and one month after STLCA is specified and its data are
put in order and the provision of information continues until the
specified period is over.

5-3. Time to renew


The time to renew complies with Paragraph 4-3 “Time to renew”.

5-4. Method of disclosure


The method of disclosure complies with Paragraph 4-4 “Method of
disclosure”.

5-5. Subjects for disclosure


The subjects for disclosure are stipulated in Paragraph 4-5 “Subjects for
disclosure”.

6. Publication of ATCSF of network systems other than ISF


When UIs request disclosure of the information concerning ATCSF of
network systems other than ISF, Section 1 “Information publication”
shows how it should be done.

281
Attached Table 8-1 Information publicized by ESCJ, method of publication,
scope of publication, and timing of publication
Type of Method of Scope of Time to
publication Information items publication publication publish
Posting (a) ESCJ rules Website of All the In each case
ESCJ (for registrants
general) or including
distributio end-use
n and so customers
forth
(b) Various statistical information (*1) (nationwide Same as Same as Determined
statistical values of the items below, etc.) above above separately in
the business
operation
rules of ESCJ
Disclosure (c) Deciding factors of ATC, operating capacity, margin, the system Members of Determined
scheduled power flow and superposed power flow of ISF (*2), for ESCJ in Section 2
(distinction of thermal capacity, system stability, voltage publicizing Registered “Disclosure of
stability or frequency maintenance), of system users of the ATCSF”
the names of the STLCA, their specified periods, and their informatio system for
summary system diagram, the names of the ISF where n publicizing
operating capacity decreases owing to scheduled outage and so of system
forth, ATC and so forth after operating capacity decreased, informatio
and supplementary items of the reason for constraints n
(d) Nationwide demand forecasting Same as Same as Determined
・ Total amount of nationwide demand power [maximum above above in Section 3 of
demand power (net) in each month of the 1st and 2nd fiscal Chapter 4
years, maximum demand power (gross) in the following “Generation
month, maximum demand power (gross) and the forecasted schedule”
time in the following day, minimum demand power (gross) and
the forecasted time in the following day]
・ Total amount of nationwide supply power for the total
amount of demand power [maximum supply power (net) in
each month of the 1st and 2nd fiscal years, maximum supply
power (gross) in the following month, maximum supply power
(gross) in the following day]
(e) Plan and status of implementation of scheduled outage of Same as Same as Determined
interconnection facilities and SOIAIs [names of the entities, above above in Section 4 of
subjects of the scheduled outage, start time and end time of Chapter 4
the scheduled outage (planned and actual), outage distinction “Coordination
(consecutive or daily), contents of the scheduled outage, of Scheduled
constraint points, status of implementation, distinction of the Outage”
application, distinction of the plan, the reason for (STLCA is
modification, names of the applicants] based on the
above.)
(f) Power flow of ISF (*1) Same as Same as Determined
(present power flow, result of the day) above above separately in
the business
operation
rules of ESCJ
(g) Demand power Same as Same as Same as
・Total amount of nationwide present demand power, actual above above above
demand curve of the day, actual maximum power and the
generation time of the day
(h) Status of failure of ISF (*1) (names of the equipment, Same as Same as In each case
occurrence time, status of restoration, the causes) above above
(*1) Specific items of statistical data are determined separately in the business operation
rules of ESCJ
(*2) Determined in Section 7 of Chapter 4 “Definitions of interconnections and so forth”

282
Attached Table 8-2 Information publicized by TDS, means of publication,
objects for publication and timing of publication
Time to
Type of Information items Method of Scope of publish
publication publication publication (Time to
renew)
Posting (a) System rules of TDS Website of TDS or All the In each case
(rules, publication of which was distribution, etc. registrants
determined in (1) and (3) of Paragraph including
6 of Section 1 “Information which end-use
TDSVIU/TSWEU publicize”) customers
Showing (b) Status of failure of transmission Individual showing Requester Same as above
and distribution lines and so forth and explanation,
(names of the equipment, occurrence according to an
time, status of restoration, the causes) inquiry to the
wheeling service
center and so forth
(*2) over the counter
or by telephone
(c) Information of system Same as above Same as Same as above
interconnection including wheeling above
service
(information, the showing of which was
determined in (2) of Paragraph 7 of
Section 1 “Protection of information”)
(*2) Determined in the rules of information publication by TDS based on (2)-a of
Paragraph 6 of Section 1 “Information which TDSVIU/TSWEU publicize”, in
concrete terms

283
Attached Paper 8-1 Information to be protected (special high voltage)

1. Third party’s information and information not to be publicized for


security reasons
(1) Third party’s information
Third parties mean corporations excluding ESCJ and distribution
sectors, other parties, and individuals who carry on business.

a. Information whose publication may harm the parties’


competitive position and other just profits.
○Individual party’s business condition
・ Circumstances of development, performance, conditions of
scheduled outage, operating cost, and operating plans and
records of power resources (wholesale procurement)
・Circumstances of procurement and consumption of fuel
・Demand trends (distribution), demand records
・ Information which influences the competition such as sales
information and so forth

b. Information not to be publicized to third parties under normal


social conventions
○Individual contracts, Customer information and others whose
confidentiality needs to be protected
・Parties with contracts, address of the parties, contract period,
contract power, contract price, contract conditions, business
conditions of third parties and so forth
(2) Information not to be publicized for security reasons
・Security system and power supply conditions of the network
systems in national events and so forth
(3) Information not to be publicized under normal social conventions
by ESCJ and transmission sectors

2. Of information items used in power systems, those that require


attention to security
Information that may threaten the security of the system if used for
unintended purposes

(1) Transmission system diagram of the control area (transmission


capacity, bank capacity)
(2) Estimated and actual power flow diagram of the control area
(3) Scheduled outage plan and the actual outage of the control area
(4) Data concerning power system engineering of the control area
・Equipment constants (voltage and impedance of transmission
lines and transformers), short-circuit capacity, installation
circumstances of system protective relay
(5) Transmission and substation facilities plan of the control area
(6) Actual outage record in the control area, etc.

284
Attached Paper 8-2 Information to be protected (high voltage)

1. Third party’s information and information not to be publicized for


security reasons

(1) Third party’s information


Third parties mean corporations excluding ESCJ and distribution
sectors, other parties, and individuals who carry on business.

a. Information whose publication may harm the parties’


competitive position and other just profits
○Individual party’s business condition
・ Circumstances of development, performance, conditions of
scheduled outage, operating cost, and operating plans and
records of power resources (wholesale procurement)
・Circumstances of procurement and consumption of fuel
・Demand trends (distribution), demand records
・ Information which influences the competition such as sales
information and so forth

b. Information not to be publicized to third parties under normal


social conventions
○Individual contracts, Customer information and others whose
confidentiality needs to be protected
・Parties with contracts, address of the parties, contract period,
contract power, contract price, contract conditions, business
conditions of third parties and so forth
(2) Information not to be publicized for security reasons
・Security system and power supply conditions of the network
systems in national events and so forth
(3) Information not to be publicized under normal social conventions
by ESCJ and distribution sectors

2. Of information items used in power systems, those that require


attention to security
Information that may threaten the security of the system if used for
unintended purposes

(1) Distribution system diagram of the distribution lines


(transmission capacity, bank capacity)
(2) Estimated and actual power flow diagram of the distribution lines
(3) Data concerning power system engineering of the distribution lines
・Facility constants (voltage and impedance of distribution lines
and transformers), short-circuit capacity, installation
circumstances of system protective relay
(4) Distribution facilities plan of the distribution lines
(5) Actual outage record of the distribution lines, etc.

285
【Appendix】 Glossary
“Publication” collectively refers to “Posting”, “Disclosure” and
“Showing”.

“Posting” means providing information widely to the public, by web site


open to the public or distribution and so forth.

“Disclosure” means providing information to the restricted viewers by


the system for publicizing of system information and so forth.

“Showing” means explaining to individuals who request publication of


information on power systems while ensuring information security.

“Demand peak” means the annual maximum value of average power for
the highest 3 days every month.

286
Chapter 9 Rules of Reliability Assessment

This chapter describes the items to be assessed, the contents and time of
data to be submitted for consideration by VIUs and PPS, the method of
assessing supply security, and the time to write the report by ESCJ, as
ESCJ collects and summarizes the reports concerning the reliability
assessment (nationwide supply and demand balance, reliability of
interconnected power systems).

1. Assessment
Reliability assessment by ESCJ is as follows.
(1) Nationwide supply and demand balance
a. Long-term and short-term
①Long-term
Nationwide supply and demand balance in August of the 5th and
10th fiscal years

②Short-term
Nationwide supply and demand balance in August of the 1st and
2nd fiscal years

b. Each season (summer/winter)


Nationwide supply and demand in summer and winter of the 1st
fiscal year

(2) Interconnected power systems


a. Long-term and short-term
①Long-term
Reliability of interconnected power systems in August of the 5th
and 10th fiscal years

②Short-time
Reliability of interconnected power systems in August of the 1st
and 2nd fiscal years

As for the 1st fiscal year, however, the reliability of


interconnected power systems during specific periods (between

287
seasons, night time of holidays and so forth) necessary for
calculating the monthly operating capacity is also assessed.

b. By season (summer/winter)
Reliability assessment of interconnected systems in
summer/winter of the 1st fiscal year

2. Required data for consideration


(1) Data concerning nationwide supply and demand balance
ESCJ is to calculate the nationwide supply and demand balance
necessary for preparing a reliability assessment report. VIUs and
PPS submit the following data.

a. Demand data
VIUs submit the following demand estimates to ESCJ based on
Japan Electric Power Survey Committee’s forecasting.

(a) Long-term and short-term


①Long-term
Maximum demand (kW) in August of the 5th and 10th fiscal
years

②Short-term
Maximum demand (kW) in August of the 1st and 2nd fiscal years

(b) Each season (summer/winter)


Maximum demand (kW) in each month subject to summer and
winter of the 1st fiscal year

b. Supply power data


VIUs and PPS submit the following plans of supply power to be
procured by themselves. These plans are based on their supply
and demand planning and so forth.
(a) Long-term and short-term
①Long-term
Planned supply power (kW) in August of the 5th and 10th fiscal
years

288
②Short-term
Planned supply power (kW) in August of the 1st and 2nd fiscal
years

(b) By season (summer/winter)


Planned supply power (kW) in each month subject to summer and
winter of the 1st fiscal year

(2) Data necessary for assessing reliability of interconnected power


systems and calculating operating capacity of interconnections
TSVIUs are to calculate the operating capacity of interconnections
required for assessing the reliability of interconnected power
systems. They prepare the data for calculation as follows.

a. VIUs’ data
Generator data and others should be obtained from generating
sectors of VIUs. As for generator output data and demand data,
they should be based on VIUs’ plans and forecasting.

b. Data excluding VIUs’


The data provided during interconnection examinations should
be used based on the generator data and others held by entities
excluding VIUs.

Generation planning data are to be in compliance with the


generator output data. The details are based on Section 3 of
Chapter 4 “Generation schedule”.

If those who calculate the operating capacity judge that they need
more data, they can request them after confirming the data to be
provided, requesting the renewed data and explaining the
necessity to the entities excluding VIUs.

3. Items for examination and submission for assessing reliability of


interconnected power systems and calculating operating capacity
(1) Procedures for assessing the reliability of interconnected power

289
systems and calculating of operating capacity
Those who calculate the operating capacity should calculate the
operating capacity of interconnections, and CIPSO assesses and
examines the reliability of interconnected power systems and the
operating capacity. Details of assessment and examination are
determined by CIPSO.

In principle, the criteria of assessing the reliability assessment of


interconnected power systems are based on Section 5 of Chapter 2
“Criteria of system security” and the rules of system development
determined by related VIUs. Items to be checked in calculating the
operating capacity and items to submit concerning the calculation
result are shown in (2) and (3).

(2) Items to be checked in calculating the operating capacity


Those who calculate the operating capacity consider limits to the
following items:

① Thermal capacity
② Stability
③ Voltage stability
④ Frequency maintenance

The details are based on Section 9 of Chapter 4 “ATC of ISF”.


Those who perform the calculations are to report the tools
necessary for examining the limit values to CIPSO. However, no
reporting is necessary if there have been no changes in the tools
from the previous fiscal year.

(3) Items to submit concerning calculation result of operating capacity


Those who calculate the operating capacity calculate the operating
capacity of interconnections according to (2) and submit the
following data to CIPSO.

a. Long-term and short-term


①Long-term
Operating capacity (kW) in August of the 5th and 10th fiscal

290
years for regular system configurations

②Short-term
Operating capacity (kW) in August of the 1st and 2nd fiscal years
Operating capacity (kW) in each month for the 1st fiscal year

b. By season (summer/winter)
Operating capacity (kW) (renewed) in summer and winter of the
1st fiscal year

4. When to submit
VIUs and PPS in principle are to submit the values determined in (2) of
Paragraph 2 “Required data for consideration” and (3) of Paragraph 3
“Items for examination and submission for assessing reliability of
interconnected power systems and calculating of operating capacity”, by
the appointed days below.

・Long-term and short-term data: March 25 each year


・Data concerning the assessment report by season (summer of the 1st
fiscal year): June 20 each year
・Data concerning the assessment report by season (winter of the 1st
fiscal year): November 20 each year

5. Reliability assessment
The circumstances of nationwide supply and demand balance and
reliability of interconnected power systems are determined by the board
of directors of ESCJ after they are assessed by CIPSO. Details of the
assessment and examination by CIPSO are worked out by CIPSO
separately.

In the event of a serious problem that exerts a large impact on the


system security, system security is assessed by CIPSO when necessary.
.

6. Production and publication of reliability assessment report


ESCJ produces a report on the reliability assessment every year based
on the assessment result of Paragraph 5 “Reliability assessment” and

291
publicizes it. The contents of the report are shown below. In the event
that the system security is reassessed because of a problem that exerts
a large impact on the system security, the reliability assessment report
is to be publicized by CIPSO in accordance with the following:

(1) Nationwide supply and demand balance


(a) Long-term and short-term: supply and demand power in August

(b) By season (summer/winter): supply and demand power in each


season

(2) Reliability of interconnected power systems and operating capacity


of interconnections
(a) Long-term and short-term
Reliability of interconnected systems and operating capacity in
August are assessed.
However, the operating capacity in every month is also assessed for
the 1st fiscal year.

(b) By season (summer/winter)


Reliability of interconnected systems and operating capacity in each
season are assessed.

The timing of publication is as follows, in principle.

・Long-term and short-term assessment report: the last day of every


March
・Assessment report by season (summer of the 1st fiscal year): the last
day of every June
・Assessment report by season (winter of the 1st fiscal year): the last day
of every November

292

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen